Honda Accord Sedan 2005 Owner Manual

2005 Accord 4dr Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................. ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 4
Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 7
Seat belts, SRS, and child protection
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 55
Indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column
ProCarManuals.com
Features ............................................................................................................................................105
Climate, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and HomeLink
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 159
Fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 173
Engine and transmission operation
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 197
Schedules, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 245
Flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 271
Vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 287
Warranty and contact information
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 291
How to order
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
Fluid capacities and tire pressures
Navigation System
０４／０５／２７１７：４２：３９３１ＳＤＡ６２００００２
▼
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2005 Honda Accord was a wise As you read this manual, you will
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your Honda, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
ProCarManuals.com
you can refer to it at any time.

California Proposition 65 Warning
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights WARNING: This product contains
and responsibilities. or emits chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual and birth defects or other
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. reproductive harm.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda
dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to Event Data Recorders
your Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns. This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
i
０４／０５／２７１７：４２：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２００００３
▼
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
responsibility. Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed These signal words mean:
ProCarManuals.com
decisions about safety, we have

provided operating procedures and You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
other information on labels and in HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
hurt you or others. HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

possible to warn you about all the instructions.
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
use your own good judgement. Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
０４／０５／２７１７：４３：３８３１ＳＤＡ６２００００７
▼
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
AIRBAGS (P.11, 23)

INDICATORS (P.58)
GAUGES (P.64)
MIRROR CONTROLS
ProCarManuals.com
(P.94) AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.118)
HEATING/COOLING
POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROLS
SWITCH (P.106)
(P.79)
AUTOMATIC
POWER WINDOW TRANSMISSION
SWITCHES (P.178)
(P.95) MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
(P.176)
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER HOOD RELEASE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

(P.85) HANDLE (P.103)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER (P.163)
(P.162)
4
０４／０５／２７１７：４３：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２００００８
▼
Main Menu
INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG

BRIGHTNESS WIPERS/WASHERS OFF INDICATOR
(P.72) (P.69) (P.31)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
ProCarManuals.com
(P.70)
HAZARD
REMOTE AUDIO WARNING BUTTON
CONTROLS (P.72)
(P.147)
CRUISE CONTROLS
VOICE CONTROL (P.151)
SWITCHES＊
MOONROOF REAR WINDOW

SWITCH DEFOGGER
(P.73, 109, 112)
(P.98)
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM STEERING WHEEL HORN

(P.187) ADJUSTMENT
(P.74)
＊ : Only on vehicles equipped with Navigation System. Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
5
０４／０５／２７１７：４３：５２３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１０
▼
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Additional Safety Precautions .... 19 All Children Should Sit in the
information about how to protect Additional Information About Your Back Seat .................................. 35
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belts .................................. 20 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt System Components ... 20 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 35

explains how your airbags work. And Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 20 Infants ........................................... 35
it tells you how to properly restrain Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ........ 21 Small Children.............................. 35
ProCarManuals.com
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 21 Larger Children ........................... 35
Additional Information About Your If You Must Drive with Several
Airbags ...................................... 23 Children .................................... 37
Airbag System Components ....... 23 If a Child Requires Close
How Your Front Airbags Work ......... 25 Attention ................................... 37
Advanced Airbags ....................... 27 Additional Safety Precautions .... 38
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 Protecting Infants and
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 9 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Small Children.......................... 39
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 Work.......................................... 30 Protecting Infants ........................ 39
Airbags .......................................... 11 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 30 Protecting Small Children .......... 40
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 How the Side Airbag Off Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 41
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13 Indicator Works ....................... 31 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 13 How the Passenger Airbag Off Installing a Child Seat with
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 14 Indicator Works ....................... 31 LATCH...................................... 43
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 15 Airbag Service .............................. 32 Protecting Larger Children ............ 48
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Additional Safety Precautions .... 33 Additional Safety Precautions .... 51
Belts ...................................... 16 Protecting Children − General Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 52
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Guidelines ................................. 34 Safety Labels .................................... 53
Position ................................. 17 All Children Must Be
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18 Restrained ................................ 34
7
０４／０５／２７１７：４４：０５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１１
▼
Main Menu Table of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this While airbags can save lives, they Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. can cause serious or fatal injuries to crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page occupants who sit too close to them, the higher the speed, the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the or are not properly restrained. risk, but serious injuries can also
most important. Infants, young children, and short occur at lower speeds. Never drive
ProCarManuals.com
adults are at the greatest risk. Be faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt sure to follow all instructions and conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in warnings in this manual. maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts, Don’t Drink and Drive Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
not replace them. So even though Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even Condition
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, one drink can reduce your ability to Having a tire blowout or a
make sure you and your passengers respond to changing conditions, and mechanical failure can be extremely
always wear your seat belts, and your reaction time gets worse with hazardous. To reduce the possibility
wear them properly (see page 16 ). every additional drink. So don’t drink of such problems, check your tire
and drive, and don’t let your friends pressures and condition frequently,
Restrain All Children drink and drive, either. and perform all regularly scheduled
Children age 12 and under should maintenance (see page 199 ).
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. Infants and small children
should be restrained in a child seat.
Larger children should use a booster
and a lap/shoulder belt until they
can use the belt properly without a
booster (see pages 34 − 51 ).
8
０４／０５／２７１７：４４：１４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１２
▼
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(3) (10) (8) (9) (1) (4) features that work together to
(8) protect you and your passengers
(2) during a crash.

(7) Some features do not require any
ProCarManuals.com
action on your part. These include a

strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(6)
(7) However, you and your passengers
(5) (11) can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
(1) Safety Cage a proper position and always wear
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if
(5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly.
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags The following pages explain how you
(9) Side Curtain Airbags can take an active role in protecting
(10) Door Locks yourself and your passengers.
(2) (11) Seat Belt Tensioners
9
０４／０５／２７１７：４４：２９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１３
▼
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
includes a light on the though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
ProCarManuals.com
instrument panel to remind you and

your passengers to fasten your seat Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
belts. passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Why Wear Seat Belts injury from an inflating airbag and
Seat belts are the single most allows you to get the best
effective safety device for adults and When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
in child seats.) so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
Not wearing a seat belt properly can reduce your risk of serious
increases the chance of serious Help protect you in almost every injury.
injury or death in a crash, even type of crash, including frontal,
though your vehicle has airbags. side, and rear impacts and What You Should Do:
rollovers. Always wear your seat belt, and
In addition, most states and all make sure you wear it properly.
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
10
０４／０５／２７１７：４４：３８３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１４
▼
Airbags

ProCarManuals.com
Your vehicle has a Supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to Your vehicle also has side curtain
Restraint System (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the airbags to help protect the heads of
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger the driver, front passenger, and
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side passengers in the outer rear seating
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 28 for more positions during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags severe side impact (see page 30 for
25 for more information on how work). more information on how your side
your front airbags work). curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
11
０４／０５／２７１７：４４：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１５
▼
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
ProCarManuals.com
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in severe crash,
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. even when seat belts are properly
impacts, or minor frontal or side worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do

their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
12
０４／０６／０１１４：０９：２１３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１６
▼
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide chance of someone being thrown out
instructions on how to properly of the vehicle during a crash, and it
protect the driver, adult passengers, helps prevent passengers from

and teenage children who are large accidentally opening a door and
enough and mature enough to drive falling out.
ProCarManuals.com
or ride in the front.

Locking the doors also helps prevent
See pages 34 − 51 for important an outsider from unexpectedly
guidelines on how to properly opening a door when you come to a
protect infants, small children and stop.
larger children who ride in your
vehicle. See page 79 for how to lock the
doors, and page 60 for how the door
1.Close and Lock the Doors monitor indicator works. Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
After everyone has entered the rear as possible while allowing you to
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed maintain full control of the vehicle.
and locked. Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
Your vehicle has a door
monitor indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when a
specific door or the trunk is not
tightly closed.
CONTINUED
13
０４／０５／２７１７：４５：０７３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１７
▼
If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
ProCarManuals.com
The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure
steering wheel in and out (see page the seat is locked in position.
74 ). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
See page 88 for how to adjust the comfortable, upright position,
If you cannot get far enough away front seats. leaving ample space between your
from the steering wheel and still chest and the airbag cover in the
reach the controls, we recommend center of the steering wheel.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
14
０４／０５／２７１７：４５：１８３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１８
▼
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their

death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
ProCarManuals.com
Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupant’s chest will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against
of sliding under the belt in a crash the center of the restraint. See page 90 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The head restraints.
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers with adjustable
greater the risk of injury. head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
See page 88 for how to adjust the should adjust their restraint as high
seat-backs. as possible.
15
０４／０５／２７１７：４５：２８３１ＳＤＡ６２０００１９
▼
5.Fasten and Position the Seat This spreads the forces of a crash
Belts over the strongest bones in your
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, upper body.
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
ProCarManuals.com
twisted belt can cause serious Improperly positioning the seat

injuries in a crash. belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of If the seat belt touches or crosses
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. your neck, or if it crosses your arm
This lets your strong pelvic bones instead of your shoulder, you need to
take the force of a crash and reduces adjust the seat belt anchor height.
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again

to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
16
０４／０５／２７１７：４５：３８３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２０
▼
RELEASE
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
BUTTONS lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and put on seat belts, it is

very important that they continue to
If a seat belt doesn’t seem to work sit upright, well back in their seats,
ProCarManuals.com
properly, it may not protect the with their feet on the floor, until the
occupant in a crash. vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat Sitting improperly can increase the
belt that is not working properly can chance of injury during a crash. For
result in serious injury or death. example, if an occupant slouches,
The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as lies down, turns sideways, sits
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible. forward, leans forward or sideways,
an anchor, press and hold the release or puts one or both feet up, the
buttons and slide the anchor up or See page 20 for additional chance of injury during a crash is
down as needed (it has four information about your seat belts greatly increased.
positions). and how to take care of them.
CONTINUED
17
０４／０５／２７１７：４５：４６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２１
▼
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding
vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
ProCarManuals.com
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to
the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
18
０４／０５／２７１７：４５：５４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２２
▼
Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away

Two people should never use the from the airbag covers. If your
same seat belt. If they do, they hands or arms are close to an
could be very seriously injured in a airbag cover, they could be injured

crash. if the airbag inflates.
ProCarManuals.com
Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on

belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper
reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
the belt and increase the chance of propelled inside the vehicle and
serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or

between yourself and a front near a front door. If a side airbag
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp or a side curtain airbag inflates, a
objects on your lap, or driving with cup holder or other hard object
a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
19
０４／０５／２７１７：４６：０８３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２３
▼
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt restrain your body.

Your seat belt system includes lap/ The lap and shoulder belt goes over
shoulder belts in all five seating your shoulder, across your chest, The seat belts in all positions except
positions. The front seat belts are and across your hips. the driver’s have an additional
also equipped with automatic seat locking mechanism that must be
belt tensioners. To fasten the belt, insert the latch activated to secure a child seat (see
ProCarManuals.com
plate into the buckle, then tug on the page 45 ).

The seat belt system belt to make sure the buckle is
includes an indicator on the latched (see page 16 for how to If the shoulder part of the belt is
instrument panel and a beeper to properly position the belt). pulled all the way out, the locking
remind you to fasten your seat belt. mechanism will activate. The belt
To unlock the belt, push the red will retract, but it will not allow the
If you turn the ignition switch to ON PRESS button on the buckle. Guide passenger to move freely.
(II) before fastening your belt, the the belt across your body so that it
beeper will sound and the indicator retracts completely. After exiting the To deactivate the locking
will flash. vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
way and will not get closed in the let the seat belt fully retract. To
If you do not fasten your seat belt door. refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
before the beeper stops, the as far as needed.
indicator will stop flashing but All seat belts have an emergency
remain on. locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
If you continue driving without your seat while it keeps some
fastening your seat belt, the beeper tension on the belt. During a collision
will sound and the indicator will flash or sudden stop, the retractor
again at regular intervals. automatically locks the belt to help
20
０４／０５／２７１７：４６：１９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２４
▼
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to Seat Belt Maintenance
activate primarily in frontal collisions, For safety, you should check the
and they should activate in any condition of your seat belts regularly.
collision severe enough to cause

front-airbag inflation. Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
ProCarManuals.com
The tensioners can also be activated that the latches work smoothly and
during a collision in which the front the belts retract easily. Any belt that
airbags do not deploy. In this case, is not in good condition or working
the airbags would not be needed, but properly will not provide good
the additional restraint could be protection and should be replaced as
helpful. soon as possible.
When the tensioners are activated, Honda provides a lifetime warranty

For added protection, the front seat the seat belts will remain tight until on seat belts for U.S. models. See
belts are equipped with automatic they are unbuckled in the normal your Honda Warranty Information
seat belt tensioners. When activated, manner. booklet for details.
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
CONTINUED
21
０４／０５／２７１７：４６：２５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２５
▼
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious
of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
ProCarManuals.com
The dealer should also inspect the needed.

anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
For information on how to clean your

seat belts, see page 233 .
22
０４／０５／２７１７：４６：３７３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２６
▼
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components Your airbag system includes:

(8) (9) (2) Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint
(1) (11) System) front airbags. The driver’s

(8) airbag is stored in the center of
(5) the steering wheel; the front
ProCarManuals.com
passenger’s airbag is stored in the

dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 25 ).
Two side airbags, one for the

driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).
(1) Driver’s Airbag
Two side curtain airbags, one for
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(10) (4) each side of the vehicle. The
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(7) airbags are stored in the ceiling
(5) Side Airbags (3) above the side windows. The front
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(5) (7) and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
(8) Front Impact Sensors (10) CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
(9) Passenger’s Airbag Off Indicator (4) 30 ).
(10) Side Impact Sensors (6)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
CONTINUED
23
０４／０６／０１１４：０９：３１３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２７
▼
Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 21 ). weight on the front passenger’s panel that alerts you that the
seat. These automatically turn off passenger’s side airbag has been
Sensors that can detect a the passenger’s front airbag if turned off (see page 31 ).
moderate to severe front impact or they detect an infant or small child
side impact. may be in the seat (see page 27 ). An indicator on the dashboard that
ProCarManuals.com
alerts you that the front

Sensors that can detect whether a A sophisticated electronic system passenger’s side airbag has been
child is in the passenger’s side that continually monitors and turned off (see page 31 ).
airbag path and automatically turn records information about the
the airbag off (see page 27 ). sensors, the control unit, the Emergency backup power in case
airbag activators, the seat belt your vehicle’s electrical system is
A driver’s seat position sensor that tensioners, and driver and front disconnected in a crash.
monitors the distance of the seat passenger seat belt use when the
from the front airbag. If the seat is ignition is ON (II).
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page An indicator on the instrument
27 ). panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 30 ).
24
０４／０５／２７１７：４６：５９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２８
▼
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
ProCarManuals.com
inflate within a split second of each

other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags will
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front The total time for inflation and
inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s fast that most occupants are not
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 31 ). aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
25
０４／０５／２７１７：４７：０７３１ＳＤＡ６２０００２９
▼
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
powder from the airbag’s surface. airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
Although the powder is not harmful, inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
people with respiratory problems sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
may experience some temporary depending on crash severity. or not the occupant is wearing a seat
ProCarManuals.com
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of belt.

the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do In a more severe crash, both stages
so. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
ignite first, then the second stage protection.
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time It the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
26
０４／０５／２７１７：４７：１９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００３０
▼
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
ProCarManuals.com
For both advanced airbags to work DRIVER’S

properly: SEAT PASSENGER’S
POSITION SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR SENSOR
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any cargo or metal objects sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. If the sensors detect
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will an infant or small child may be in the
inflate with less force, regardless of seat, the system will automatically
Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. turn the passenger’s front airbag off.
put their feet under the front seats.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS Indicator will come on, and
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal
them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
CONTINUED
27
０４／０５／２７１７：４７：２９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００３１
▼
When the airbag is turned off, an Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
indicator in the center of the back against cargo on the seat or
dashboard will come on indicating floor behind it.
‘‘Passenger Airbag Off’’ (see page
31 ). Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
ProCarManuals.com
If there is no passenger in the front items in the seat-back pocket.

seat, the airbag will be off. However,
the Passenger Airbag Off indicator Also, make sure the floor mat behind
will not come on. the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
To ensure that the passenger’s 233 ). If it is not, the mat may
advanced front airbag system will interfere with the proper operation
work properly, do not do anything of the sensors and operation of the
that would increase or decrease the seat. If you ever have a moderate to
weight on the front passenger’s seat. severe side impact, sensors will
This includes: detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
A rear passenger pushing or either the driver’s or the passenger’s
pulling on the back of the side airbag.
passenger’s seat.
28
０４／０５／２７１７：４７：３８３１ＳＤＡ６２０００３２
▼
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the Side Airbag Off Indicator
side impact. If the impact is on the To reduce the risk of injury from an comes on (see page 31 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s inflating side airbag, your vehicle has passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there an automatic cutoff system for the passenger is out of the airbag’s

is no passenger. passenger’s side airbag. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
ProCarManuals.com
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, this system
should wear their seat belts and sit is designed to shut off the side There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. airbag if a child leans sideways and the moment the passenger moves
the child’s head is in the side airbag into or out of the airbag deployment
deployment path. path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a A front seat passenger should not
larger adult slouches and leans use a cushion or other object as a
sideways into the airbag’s backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
deployment path. system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front

passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
29
０４／０５／２７１７：４７：５１３１ＳＤＡ６２０００３３
▼
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passenger’s side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
To get the best protection from the
ProCarManuals.com
side curtain airbags, occupants When you turn the ignition switch to
should wear their seat belts and sit ON (II), this indicator will come on
upright and well back in their seats. briefly then go out. This tells you the
system is working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any

other time, or does not come on at all,
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid deceleration If the SRS indicator does not come
and signal the control unit to on after you turn the ignition
instantly inflate the side curtain switch to ON (II).
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.
30
０４／０５／２７１７：４８：０２３１ＳＤＡ６２０００３４
▼
If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off How the Passenger Airbag Off
the airbags and seat belt tensioners Indicator Works Indicator Works
may not work properly when you U.S. Canada This indicator
need them. alerts you that the

passenger’s side
airbag has been automatically shut
ProCarManuals.com
off. It does not mean there is a

Ignoring the SRS indicator can problem with your side airbags.
result in serious injury or death U.S. Canada
if the airbag systems or When you turn the ignition switch to
tensioners do not work properly. ON (II), the indicator should light
briefly and go out (see page 59 ). If it
Have your vehicle checked by a doesn’t light, stays on, or comes on
dealer as soon as possible if while driving without a passenger in PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
the SRS indicator alerts you to the front seat, have the system
a possible problem. checked. This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect an infant or small child may
be in the front passenger’s seat. It
does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
31
０４／０５／２７１７：４８：１１３１ＳＤＡ６２０００３５
▼
If no one is riding in the front seat, Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to a
the airbag will be automatically shut Your airbag systems are virtually problem. Take your vehicle to an
off. However, the indicator will not maintenance free, and there are no authorized Honda dealer as soon
come on. parts you can safely service. as possible. If you ignore this
However, you must have your indication, your airbags may not
However, if the indicator comes on vehicle serviced if: operate properly.
ProCarManuals.com
with no passenger in the front, or

with an adult in the seat, there may An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag If your vehicle has a moderate to
be a problem with the advanced that has deployed must be severe impact. Even if your
airbag system. Have the vehicle replaced along with the control airbags do not inflate, your dealer
checked by the dealer as soon as unit and other related parts. If a should inspect the driver’s seat
possible. front airbag inflates, the seat belt position sensor and the front
tensioners must also be replaced. passenger’s weight sensors to
The Passenger Airbag Off indicator make sure they are operating
may also come on and off repeatedly Do not try to remove or replace properly.
if total weight on the seat is near the any airbag by yourself. This must
airbag cutoff threshold. be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
If this happens, have the passenger
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, have the passenger
sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
32
０４／０５／２７１７：４８：１７３１ＳＤＡ６２０００３６
▼
Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat-

Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting
airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing
seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers

protection. can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
ProCarManuals.com
Do not tamper with airbag

components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not remove or modify a front

seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
33
０４／０５／２８１２：０２：２６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００３７
▼
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
ProCarManuals.com
of the death of children ages 12 and

under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 48 − 51 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 39 − 47 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
34
０４／０５／２７１７：４８：３９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００３８
▼
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Poses Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. The National Highway the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
ProCarManuals.com
Traffic Safety Administration and large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
Transport Canada recommend that force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
all children age 12 and under be child with enough force to kill or
properly restrained in a back seat. Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
advanced front airbag system, which
Children who ride in back are less can automatically turn the Larger Children
likely to be injured by striking passenger’ front airbag off (see page Children who have outgrown child
interior vehicle parts during a 27 ), please follow the guidelines seats are also at risk of being injured
collision or hard braking. Also, below. or killed by an inflating passenger’s
children cannot be injured by an front airbag. Whenever possible,
inflating front airbag when they ride Infants larger children should sit in the back
in the back. Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat
with a passenger’s front airbag. If belt (see page 48 for important
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back information about protecting larger
of the child seat with enough force children).
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
CONTINUED
35
▼
Protecting Children - General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger's U.S. Models DASHBOARD

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISOR
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
ProCarManuals.com
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISOR
０４／０５／２７１７：４９：０６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４０
▼
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put contact, we strongly recommend
children can be properly restrained. an infant or small child in the front that another adult ride with the

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the child in a back seat. The back seat
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires is far safer for a child than the
ProCarManuals.com
front: attention. front.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 48 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 13 ).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 16 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
16 ).
37
０４／０５／２７１７：４９：１５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４１
▼
Additional Safety Precautions Use childproof door locks to Lock all doors and the trunk when
Never hold an infant or child on prevent children from opening the your vehicle is not in use. Children
your lap. If you are not wearing a doors. This can prevent children who play in vehicles can
seat belt in crash, you could be from accidentally falling out (see accidentally get trapped inside.
thrown forward and crush the page 81 ). Teach your children not to play in
child against the dashboard or a or around vehicles. Know how to
ProCarManuals.com
seat-back. If you are wearing a Do not leave children alone in a operate the emergency trunk
seat belt, the child can be torn vehicle. Leaving children without opener and decide if your children
from your arms and be seriously adult supervision is illegal in most should be shown how to use this
hurt or killed. states and Canadian provinces, feature (see page 86 ).
and can be very hazardous.
Never put a seat belt over yourself Keep vehicle keys and remote
and a child. During a crash, the For example, infants and small transmitters out of the reach of
belt could press deep into the child children left in a vehicle on a hot children. Even very young
and cause serious or fatal injuries. day can die from heatstroke. A children learn how to unlock
child left alone with the key in the vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
Never let two children use the ignition can accidentally set the switch, and open the trunk, which
same seat belt. If they do, they vehicle in motion, possibly injuring can lead to accidental injury or
could be very seriously injured in a themselves or others. death.
crash.
38
０４／０５／２７１７：４９：２５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４２
▼
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
ProCarManuals.com
a forward-facing position. If placed

facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving the seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking the
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least Or, it can interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
39
０４／０５／２７１７：４９：３５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４３
▼
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any situation, we strongly Protecting Small Children Child Seat Placement

recommend that you install the child We strongly recommend placing a
seat directly behind the front forward-facing child seat in a back
passenger’s seat, move the seat as seat, not the front.
far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Even with advanced front airbags,
ProCarManuals.com
a smaller rear-facing child seat. which can automatically turn the

passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 31 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least one year old,
seat in the back seat, not the and who fits within the child seat
front. maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we

recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
40
０４／０５／２７１７：４９：４６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４４
▼
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forward- Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
facing child seat in the front, move When buying a child seat, you need equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as to choose either a conventional child compatible child seat can be installed
possible, be sure the child seat is seat, or one designed for use with using a seat belt.

firmly secured to the vehicle, and the the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
child is properly strapped in the seat. Children (LATCH) system. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
ProCarManuals.com
provide proper protection, a child

Conventional child seats must be seat should meet three
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, requirements:
Placing a forward-facing child whereas LATCH-compatible seats
seat in the front seat can result are secured by attaching the seat to 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
in serious injury or death if the hardware built into the two outer Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
front airbag inflates. seating positions in the back seat. Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
If you must place a forward- Since LATCH-compatible child seats
facing child seat in front, move are easier to install and reduce the 2. The child seat should be of the
the vehicle seat as far back as possibility of improper installation, proper type and size to fit the child.
possible, and properly restrain we recommend selecting this style. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
the child. facing for small children.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page 43 ).
CONTINUED
41
０４／０５／２７１７：４９：５７３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４５
▼
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
vehicle seating position (or After selecting a proper child seat, should not reduce the child seat’s
positions) where it will be used. and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
there are three main steps in
Before purchasing a conventional installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
child seat, or using a previously installing it in a different seating
ProCarManuals.com
purchased one, we recommend that 1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
you test the seat in the specific the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
vehicle seating position, or positions, secured to the vehicle with the lap
where the seat will be used. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Make sure the child is properly
Tethers for Children) system. A strapped in the child seat
child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat maker’s
secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
forward and from side to side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seats.
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
42
０４／０５／２７１７：５０：０８３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４６
▼
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children) at the outer
rear seats.
ProCarManuals.com
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH. LOWER ANCHOR MARKS Rigid type
The location of each lower anchor is To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
indicated by a small button above the seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
anchor point. lower anchors according to the
1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat maker’s instructions.
tongue away from the lower
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connection as
2. Make sure there are no objects shown above.
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
43
０４／０６／０１１４：０９：３９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４７
▼
TETHER STRAP HOOK

7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
ProCarManuals.com
Flexible type ANCHOR
Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page

have a flexible-type connection as 90 ), then route the tether strap
shown above. through the legs of the head
restraint, over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
the child seat maker’s instructions twisted.
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
44
０４／０５／２７１７：５０：２４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４８
▼
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
ProCarManuals.com
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
45
０４／０５／２７１７：５０：３２３１ＳＤＡ６２０００４９
▼
To deactivate the locking

mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
ProCarManuals.com
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side to side to
the belt near the buckle and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
46
０４／０６／０１１４：０９：５４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００５０
▼
Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Outer Anchor Using the Center Anchor
Tether
TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK

ProCarManuals.com
ANCHOR ANCHOR
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
1. After properly securing the child 1. After properly securing the child
A child seat with a tether can be seat (see page 43 ), lift the head seat (see page 45 ), route the
installed in any seating position in restraint, then route the tether tether strap over the seat-back.
the back seat, using one of the strap over the seat-back and
anchorage points shown above. through the head restraint legs. 2. Follow steps 2 and 3 from the
2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach previous column.
Since a tether can provide additional the tether strap hook to the
security to the lap/shoulder belt anchor, making sure the strap is
installation, we recommend using a not twisted.
tether whenever one is required or 3. Tighten the strap according to the
available. seat maker’s instructions.
47
０４／０５／２８１２：０２：３５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００５１
▼
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front
belt. airbag inflates.
ProCarManuals.com
The following pages give If a larger child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
48
０４／０５／２７１７：５１：０３３１ＳＤＡ６２０００５２
▼
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Booster seats can be high-back or
between the child’s neck and arm? low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster meets federal
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as safety standards (see page 41 ) and

possible, touching the child’s that you follow the booster seat
thighs? maker’s instructions.
ProCarManuals.com
5. Will the child be able to stay If a child who uses a booster must
seated like this for the whole trip? ride in front, move the vehicle seat
as far to the rear as possible, and be
If you answer yes to all these sure the child is wearing the seat
questions, the child is ready to wear belt properly.
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the A child may continue using a booster
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward- seat until the tops of the ears are
facing child seat should ride in a even with the top of the seat-back. A
back seat and use a booster seat child of this height should be tall
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
properly without the booster. without a booster.
Some states also require children to

use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the state or states where you
intend to drive.
49
０４／０５／２７１７：５１：１７３１ＳＤＡ６２０００５３
▼
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely
Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to:
The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
Administration and Transport there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual,
Canada recommend that all children should consider. and make sure you understand all
age 12 and under be properly seat belt instructions and all safety
ProCarManuals.com
restrained in a back seat. Physical Size information.

Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see page 48 ). If the seat most position.
frontal collision, the airbag can cause belt does not fit properly, with or
serious injuries to a child who is without the child sitting on a booster, Have the child sit up straight, back
unrestrained, improperly restrained, the child should not sit in front. against the seat, and feet on or
sitting too close to the airbag, or out near the floor.
of position. Maturity
To safely ride in front, a child must Check that the child’s seat belt is
A side airbag also poses risks. If any be able to follow the rules, including properly and securely positioned.
part of a larger child’s body is in the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
path of a deploying side airbag, the belt properly throughout a ride. Supervise the child. Even mature
child could receive possibly serious children sometimes need to be
injuries. reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
50
０４／０５／２７１７：５１：２４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００５４
▼
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a

Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a

crash. seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
ProCarManuals.com
Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.

part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
51
０４／０５／２７１７：５１：３４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００５５
▼
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the trunk open, airflow can pull
carbon monoxide gas. You should exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even kill trunk open, open all the windows and
vehicle properly. you. set the climate control system as
ProCarManuals.com
shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the climate
change. control system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the Fresh Air mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
underside. vehicle out of the garage.
52
▲
▼
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models U.S. models Canadian models
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully. If
ProCarManuals.com
a label comes off or becomes hard to
read, contact your dealer for a
replacement.
HOOD DASHBOARD Canadian models
U.S. models U.S. models only
U.S. models Canadian models
Canadian models
RADIATOR
CAP
０４／０５／２７１７：５２：２９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００５８
▼
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Temperature Gauge .................... 65 Seat .................................................... 88
the controls and displays that Fuel Gauge ................................... 66 Power Seat Adjustment .............. 88
contribute to the daily operation of Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 66 Driver’s Lumbar Support ............ 89
your vehicle. All the essential Maintenance Required Front Seat Adjustments .............. 89
controls are within easy reach. Indicator .................................... 66 Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Controls Near the Steering Adjustment ............................... 90

ProCarManuals.com
Wheel ........................................ 68 Driver’s Seat Power Height

Wipers and Washers ................... 69 Adjustment ............................... 90
Turn Signal and Headlights........ 70 Head Restraints ........................... 90
Automatic Lighting Off Folding Rear Seat ........................ 91
Feature ...................................... 71 Mirrors .............................................. 94
Daytime Running Lights............. 72 Adjusting the Power Mirrors ..... 94
Instrument Panel Brightness ..... 72 Power Windows ............................... 95
Hazard Warning........................... 72 Power Window Control
Rear Window Defogger .............. 73 Operations ................................ 97
Steering Wheel Adjustment ....... 74 Moonroof .......................................... 98
Keys and Locks ................................ 75 Parking Brake .................................. 99
Control Locations ............................ 56 Keys............................................... 75 Sun Visor......................................... 100
Instrument Panel ............................. 57 Immobilizer System..................... 77 Vanity Mirror ................................. 100
Instrument Panel Lights ................. 58 Ignition Switch ............................. 78 Interior Lights ................................ 101
Gauges .............................................. 64 Door Locks ................................... 79 Interior Convenience Items .......... 102
Odometer/Outside Childproof Door Locks ............... 81 Beverage Holders ...................... 103
Temperature Display .............. 64 Remote Transmitter .................... 81 Accessory Power Sockets......... 103
Odometer ...................................... 64 Trunk ............................................ 85 Console Compartment .............. 103
Outside Temperature Display.... 64 Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 86 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 104
Trip Meter .................................... 65 Seat Heaters ..................................... 87 Glove Box ................................... 104
55
０４／０５／２７１７：５２：３６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００５９
▼
Control Locations
INDICATORS(P.58) CRUISE CONTROLS (P.151)

GAUGES (P.64)
HAZARD WARNING
MOONROOF SWITCH BUTTON
(P.98) (P.72)
MIRROR CONTROLS
ProCarManuals.com
(P.94) AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.118, 119, 126, 127,
136 ,137)
POWER DOOR LOCK DIGITAL CLOCK
SWITCHES (P.149)
(P.79)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW (P.106)
SWITCHES CLIMATE CONTROL
(P.95) SYSTEM
(P.115)
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER HOOD RELEASE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

(P.85) HANDLE (P.103)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE LEVER (P.163) PARKING BRAKE LEVER
(P.162) (P.99)
56
０４／０５／２７１７：５２：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６０
▼
Instrument Panel
LOW OIL PRESSURE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.60)
INDICATOR (P.58) (ABS) INDICATOR (P.59)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.63)
CRUISE CONTROL MAIN
INDICATOR (P.63) TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.60)
ProCarManuals.com
INDICATOR (P.58) HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.62)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.63)
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR (P.70)
DOOR AND TRUNK
OPEN MONITOR (P.60)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.59)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR(P.59)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.62)

MALFUNCTION LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.61)
INDICATOR LAMP (P.58) LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.61)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.58) SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT (P.58)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
57
０４／０５／２７１７：５２：５９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６１
▼
Instrument Panel Lights
The instrument panel has many Low Oil Pressure U.S. Canada
indicators to give you important Indicator
information about your vehicle. The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on Parking Brake and Brake
Seat Belt Reminder Light when the engine is running. For System Indicator
more information, see page 258 .
ProCarManuals.com
This indicator comes on when you This indicator has two functions:
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). It Charging System
reminds you and your passengers to Indicator 1. It comes on when you turn the
fasten your seat belts. A beeper also If this indicator comes on when the ignition switch to ON (II). It is a
sounds if you have not fastened your engine is running, the battery is not reminder to check the parking
seat belt. being charged. For more information, brake. A beeper sounds if you try
see page 259 . to drive with the parking brake not
If you turn the ignition switch to ON fully released. Driving with the
(II) before fastening your seat belt, Malfunction Indicator parking brake not fully released
the beeper sounds and the indicator Lamp can damage the brakes and tires.
flashes. If you do not fasten your See page 259 .
seat belt before the beeper stops, the 2. If it remains lit after you fully
indicator stops flashing but remains release the parking brake while
on. the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
If you continue driving without could be a problem with the brake
fastening your seat belt, the beeper system. For more information, see
sounds and the indicator flashes page 261 .
again at regular intervals.
58
０４／０６／０１１４：１０：０３３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６２
▼
Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada Anti-lock Brake System

System Indicator Side Airbag Off (ABS) Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when Indicator This indicator normally comes on for
you turn the ignition switch to ON This indicator comes on when you a few seconds when you turn the
(II). If it comes on at any other time, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If ignition switch to ON (II), and when
it indicates a potential problem with it comes on at any other time, it the ignition switch is turned to

ProCarManuals.com
your front airbags. This indicator will indicates that the passenger’s side START (III). If it comes on at any
also alert you to a potential problem airbag has automatically shut off. other time, there is a problem with
with your side airbags, passenger’s For more information, see page 31 . the ABS. If this happens, have your
side airbag automatic cutoff system, vehicle checked at a dealer. With
side curtain airbags, automatic seat this on, your vehicle still has normal
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position braking ability but no anti-lock
sensor, or the front passenger’s brakes. For more information, see
weight sensors. For more page 186 .
information, see page 30 .
59
０４／０５／２７１７：５３：２１３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６３
▼
TCS Activation Indicator Traction Control System Door and Trunk Open Monitor
On LX-V6 and EX-V6 models (TCS) Indicator
This indicator has three functions: On LX-V6 and EX-V6 models
1. It comes on as a reminder that you This indicator normally comes on for
have turned off the Traction a few seconds when you turn the
Control System. ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
ProCarManuals.com
on and stays on when the Traction

2. It flashes when the TCS is Control System (TCS) is on, there is
regulating wheelspin. a problem with the TCS. For more The appropriate indicator comes on
information on the TCS, see page in this display if the trunk or either
3. If it comes on and stays on when 188 . door is not closed tightly.
the Traction Control System is on,
it indicates that there is a problem All the indicators in the monitor
with the TCS. display come on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch to
This indicator also comes on for a ON (II).
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
on and stays on at any other time, or
it does not come on when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), there
is a problem with the TCS. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. See page 188 for more
information on the TCS.
60
０４／０５／２７１７：５３：３１３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６４
▼
Turn Signal and Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

Hazard Warning (U.S. models only)
Indicators If equipped
The left or right turn signal indicator This indicator reminds you that the
blinks when you signal a lane change exterior lights are on. It comes on
or turn. If the indicators do not blink, when the light switch is in either the

ProCarManuals.com
or if they blink rapidly, it usually or position. This indicator

means one of the turn signal bulbs is will also come on when the light
burned out (see pages 229 and 230 ). switch is in AUTO and the lights
Replace the bulb as soon as possible, turn on automatically. If you turn the
since other drivers cannot see that ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)
you are signaling. or LOCK (0) without turning off the
light switch, this indicator will LOW FUEL INDICATOR
When you turn on the Hazard remain on. A reminder chime will
Warning button, both turn signal also sound when you open the driver’s This indicator comes on as a
indicators blink. All turn signals on door. reminder that you must refuel soon.
the outside of the vehicle should
flash.
61
０４／０５／２７１７：５３：４０３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６５
▼
Security System Indicator ‘‘Daytime Running High Beam Indicator

Lights’’ Indicator
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR Canadian models only This indicator comes on with the
This indicator comes on when you high beam headlights. For more
turn the ignition switch to ON (II) information, see page 71 .
with the headlight switch off and the
ProCarManuals.com
parking brake set. It should go off if On Canadian models, this indicator

you turn on the headlights or release comes on with reduced brightness
the parking brake. If it comes on at when the Daytime Running Lights
any other time, it means there is a (DRL) are on (see page 72 ).
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
This indicator comes on when the

security system is set. See page
150 for more information on the
security system.
62
０４／０５／２７１７：５３：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６６
▼
Cruise Control Main Cruise Control Indicator Immobilizer System

Indicator Indicator
Only on models equipped with Cruise Only on models equipped with Cruise This indicator comes on for a few
Control System Control System seconds when you turn the ignition
This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on when you switch to ON (II). It will go off if you
turn on the Cruise Control Master set the cruise control. See page have inserted a properly-coded

ProCarManuals.com
Button (see page 151). 151 for information on operating the ignition key. If it is not a properly-
cruise control. coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page 77 ).
This indicator also blinks several

times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only

This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 216 ).
63
０４／０６／０１１４：１０：１４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６７
▼
Gauges
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE Outside Temperature Display

On EX-L and EX-V6 models
This display shows the outside
MAINTENANCE temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
REQUIRED models) or Centigrade (Canadian
INDICATOR models). To see the outside
ProCarManuals.com
TEMPERATURE temperature, press and release the

GAUGE Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the

ODOMETER/OUTSIDE TRIP METER SELECT/RESET front bumper. Therefore, the temper-
U.S. model is shown. TEMPERATURE INDICATOR KNOB ature reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface, en-
Odometer/Outside Temperature Odometer gine heat, and the exhaust from
Display The odometer shows the total dis- surrounding traffic. This can cause
The odometer and the outside tance your vehicle has been driven. an incorrect temperature reading
temperature display use the same It measures miles in U.S. models and when your speed is under
display. To switch the display kilometers in Canadian models. 19 mph (30 km/h).
between the odometer and the It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
outside temperature, press the Canadian provincial regulations to The sensor delays the display update
Select/Reset knob. When you turn disconnect, reset, or alter the until it reaches the correct outside
the ignition switch to ON (II), what odometer with the intent to change temperature. This may take several
you last selected is displayed. the number of miles or kilometers minutes.
indicated.
64
０４／０６／０１１４：１０：２６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６８
▼
Gauges
If the outside temperature is Trip Meter Temperature Gauge

incorrectly displayed, you can adjust This meter shows the number of This shows the temperature of the
it up to ±5°F (±3°C) warmer or miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) engine’s coolant. During normal
cooler. driven since you last reset it. operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
NOTE: The temperature must be There are two trip meters: Trip A the middle of the gauge. In severe

ProCarManuals.com
stabilized before doing this and Trip B. Switch between these driving conditions, such as very hot
procedure. displays and the odometer/outside weather or a long period of uphill
temperature display by pressing the driving, the pointer may rise into the
Select the outside temperature Select/Reset knob repeatedly. Each upper half of the gauge. If it reaches
display, then press the Select/Reset trip meter works independently, so the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
knob for ten seconds. The following you can keep track of two different side of the road. Turn to page 256 for
sequence will appear for one second distances. instructions and precautions on
each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2, checking the engine’s cooling
−1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2, −1, 0, 1). When you turn the ignition switch to system.
ON (II), what you last selected is
When it reaches the desired value, displayed.
release the Select/Reset knob. You
should see the new outside To reset a trip meter, display it and
temperature displayed. then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0.’’
In certain weather conditions, Both trip meters will reset if the
temperature readings near freezing vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is disconnected.
forming on the road surface.
65
０４／０５／２７１７：５４：２８３１ＳＤＡ６２０００６９
▼
Gauges
Fuel Gauge appears again. To clear, press and Maintenance Required Indicator
This shows how much fuel you have. hold the Trip/Reset button until the
It may show slightly more or less message is replaced by the
than the actual amount. The needle odometer/outside temperature
returns to the bottom after you turn display.
off the ignition.
ProCarManuals.com
If the system still detects a loose or

missing fuel cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on.
Avoid driving with an extremely low Turn the engine off and check or
f uel level. Running out of f uel could retighten the fuel cap at least 3 clicks.
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging The MIL goes out after 3 days of MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
the catalytic converter. normal driving once the cap is INDICATOR
tightened or replaced. If it does not
Check Fuel Cap Indicator go out, have your dealer inspect the This indicator reminds you that it is
(odometer/outside temperature vehicle. For more information, see time to take your vehicle in for the
message) page 259 . vehicle’s scheduled maintenance
If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a under normal driving conditions. The
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message indicator does not reflect severe
appears as text in the odometer/ maintenance intervals.
outside temperature display after
you start the engine. Turn the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
engine off and confirm the fuel cap is for Normal and Severe Driving
installed. If it is, loosen the cap, then Conditions on page 202 (4-cylinder
retighten it at least 3 clicks. When models) or page 204 (6-cylinder
you restart the engine, the message models).
66
０４／０５／２７１７：５４：４０３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７０
▼
Gauges
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models SELECT/RESET KNOB

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km) For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)
after the Maintenance Required after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for Indicator is reset, it will come on for
2 seconds when you turn the ignition two seconds when you turn the
switch to ON (II). ignition switch to ON (II).

ProCarManuals.com
Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km) Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and
and 10,000 miles (16,000 km), this 7,500 miles (12,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition when you first turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and then flash for switch to ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds. 10 seconds.
1. Turn off the engine.
If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000
km) without having the scheduled km) without having the scheduled 2. Press and hold the Select/Reset
maintenance performed, this maintenance performed, this knob in the instrument panel, then
indicator will remain on as a constant indicator will remain on as a constant turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
reminder. reminder.
3. Hold the knob for about 10
Your dealer will reset this indicator seconds until the indicator resets.
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
dealer, reset the indicator as follows.
67
０４／０５／２７１７：５４：４６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７１
▼
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG

BRIGHTNESS WIPERS/WASHERS OFF INDICATOR
(P.72) (P.69) (P.31)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
ProCarManuals.com
(P.70)
HAZARD
REMOTE AUDIO WARNING BUTTON
CONTROLS (P.72)
(P.147)
CRUISE CONTROLS
VOICE CONTROL (P.151)
SWITCHES＊
MOONROOF REAR WINDOW

SWITCH DEFOGGER
(P.73, 109, 112)
(P.98)
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM STEERING WHEEL HORN

(P.187) ADJUSTMENT
(P.74)
＊ : Only on vehicles equipped with Navigation System. Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
68
０４／０５／２７１７：５４：５５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７２
▼
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper Push the right lever up or down to LO − The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever. Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you and

ProCarManuals.com
OFF − The wipers are not activated. hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
INT − The length of the wiper low speed, then complete one more
interval is varied automatically sweep after you release the lever.
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
1. MIST change to low speed operation when
2. OFF the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
3. INT − Intermittent (20 km/h).
4. LO − Low
5. HI − High
6. Windshield Washers
69
０４／０５／２７１７：５５：０３３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７３
▼
Turn Signal, Headlights
Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal − Push down on the Headlights − Turning the switch
left lever to signal a left turn and up on the left lever to the ‘‘ ’’
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane position turns on the parking lights,
change, push lightly on the lever in taillights, instrument panel lights,
the proper direction and hold it. The side-marker lights, and rear license
lever will return to center when you plate lights. Turning the switch to
ProCarManuals.com
release it or complete a turn. the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the

headlights. If you leave the lights on
with the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), you
will hear a reminder chime when you
open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in either of

1. Turn Signal these positions, the Lights On
2. Off indicator comes on as a reminder.
3. Parking and interior lights
4. Headlight on
5. High beams
6. Flash high beams
70
０４／０５／２７１７：５５：１０３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７４
▼
Headlights, Automatic Lighting Off Feature
High Beams − To turn on the high Automatic Lighting Off Feature If you remove the key from the
beams, push the lever forward until On all models except U.S. DX ignition switch with the headlight
you hear a click. The blue high beam This feature turns off the headlights, switch on, but do not open the door
indicator will come on (see page 62 ). parking lights, taillights, and license and get out, the lights will turn off
To turn off the high beams, pull the plate light within 15 seconds of after 10 minutes.
lever back. To flash the high beams, removing the key from the ignition

ProCarManuals.com
pull the lever farther back, and then switch and closing the driver’s door. The lights will turn on again when
release it. The high beams remain on you unlock or open the driver’s door.
until the lever is released. This feature activates if you leave If you unlock the door, but do not
the headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’ open it within 15 seconds, the lights
or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key, will go off. With the driver’s door
then open and close the driver’s door. open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
71
０４／０５／２７１７：５５：２０３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７５
▼
Daytime Running Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning
Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning

(Canadian Models)
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights and the high
beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
ProCarManuals.com
the ignition switch to ON (II) and

release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
switch off, even if you set the
parking brake.
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
The headlights revert to normal KNOB
operation when you turn them on
with the switch. The knob on the instrument panel Push the button between the center
controls the brightness of the instru- vents to turn on the hazard warning
ment panel lights. Turn the knob to lights (four-way flashers). This
adjust the brightness. causes all four outside turn signals
and both turn indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
72
０４／０５／２７１７：５５：２６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７６
▼
Rear Window Defogger
Make sure the rear window is clear

and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on

the inside of the rear window can be

ProCarManuals.com
accidentally damaged. When

cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
Manual A/C type shown
The rear window defogger will clear

fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator
above the button comes on to show
the defogger is on. It also shuts off
when you turn off the ignition switch.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
73
０４／０５／２７１７：５５：３３３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７７
▼
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment 1. Insert the key in the ignition
before you start driving. switch, and unlock the steering
column.
2. Push the lever under the steering

Adjusting the steering wheel column all the way down.
ProCarManuals.com
position while driving may

cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
3. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out to the desired
position. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
the indicator lights.
74
０４／０５／２７１７：５５：４０３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７８
▼
Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks
4. Push the lever up to lock the Keys and Locks

steering wheel in that position.
KEY MASTER VALET KEY KEY MASTER VALET KEY
5. Make sure you have securely NUMBER KEYS (LIGHT GREY) NUMBER KEY WITH (LIGHT GREY)
TAG (BLACK) TAG REMOTE
locked the steering wheel in place TRANSMITER
by trying to move it up, down, in,

ProCarManuals.com
and out.
Only on DX models On all models except DX
75
０４／０５／２７１７：５５：４６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００７９
▼
Keys and Locks
The master key fits all the locks on You should have received a key Do not drop the keys or set heavy
your vehicle. The valet key works number tag with your keys. You will objects on them.
only in the ignition and the door need this key number if you ever
locks. You can keep the trunk have to get a lost key replaced. Use Keep the keys away from liquids.
release handle, rear seat trunk only Honda-approved key blanks. If they get wet, dry them
access, and glove box locked when immediately with a soft cloth.
ProCarManuals.com
you leave your vehicle and the valet These keys contain electronic
key at a parking facility. circuits that are activated by the The DX model keys do not contain
Immobilizer System. They will not batteries. Do not try to take them
work to start the engine if the apart.
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
76
０４／０５／２７１７：５５：５５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８０
▼
Immobilizer System
The Immobilizer System protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine will not following two conditions: (1) This device
start. Do not attempt to alter this system may not cause harmful interference, and
or add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any

ProCarManuals.com
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including
ON (II), the Immobilizer System your vehicle undriveable. interference that may cause undesired
indicator should come on for a few operation.
seconds, then go out. If the indicator If you lose your key and you cannot
starts to blink, it means the system start the engine, contact your dealer. Changes or modifications not expressly
does not recognize the coding of the approved by the party responsible for
key. Turn the ignition switch to compliance could void the user’s
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert authority to operate the equipment.
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again. This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
The system may not recognize your Operation is subject to the following two
key’s coding if another immobilizer conditions: (1) this device may not cause
key or other metal object (i.e. key interference, and (2) this device must
fob) is near the ignition switch when accept any interference that may cause
you insert the key. undesired operation of the device.
77
０４／０５／２７１７：５６：０２３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８１
▼
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0) − You can insert or ACCESSORY (I) − You can

remove the key only in this position. operate the audio system and the
To turn the key, the shift lever must accessory power sockets in this
be in Park, and you must push the position.
key in slightly. If the front wheels
are turned, the anti-theft lock may ON (II) − This is the normal key
ProCarManuals.com
make it difficult to turn the key. position when driving. Several of the
Firmly turn the steering wheel to the lights on the instrument panel come
left or to the right as you turn the on as a test when you turn the
key. ignition switch from ACCESSORY
(I) to ON (II).
START (III) − Use this position

The ignition switch has four only to start the engine. The switch
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY returns to ON (II) when you let go of
(I), ON (II), START (III) the key.
78
０４／０５／２７１７：５６：１１３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８２
▼
Ignition Switch, Door Locks
You will hear a reminder beeper if Door Locks On all models except U.S. DX
you leave the key in the ignition Each front door has a master door
switch in the LOCK (0) or MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH lock switch. Either switch locks and
ACCESSORY (I) position and open top unlocks all doors. Push the top of the
the driver’s door. Remove the key to switch to lock all doors; push the
turn off the beeper. bottom to unlock them.

bottom
ProCarManuals.com
If your vehicle has an automatic To lock any passenger’s door when

transmission, the shift lever must be getting out of the vehicle, push the
in Park before you can remove the lock tab down and close the door.
key from the ignition switch.
Removing the key from the U.S. DX

ignition switch while driving To lock the driver’s door, pull and
locks the steering. This can hold either the inside or outside door
cause you to lose control of the handle, then push the lock tab down.
vehicle. Release the handle, then close the
door.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when On all models except U.S. DX, you
parked. can open or close the windows by
using the key in the driver’ s door
(see page 97 ).
79
０４／０５／２７１７：５６：１６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８３
▼
Door Locks
On Canadian DX models, all doors On LX and EX models, all doors can Lockout Prevention
can be locked from the outside by be locked from the outside by using With the driver’s door open and the
using the key in either front door. To the key in the driver’s door. To key in the ignition, both door lock
unlock only the driver’s door from unlock just the driver’s door, turn the switches are disabled. They are not
the outside, insert the key in the key and release it. If you turn the disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
driver’s door lock, turn the key and key again, all doors will unlock. Pushing the switch down on the
ProCarManuals.com
release it. If you turn the key again, open passenger’s door will lock all
all doors will unlock. All four doors doors.
will unlock when you unlock the
passenger’s door with the key.
80
０４／０５／２７１７：５６：２７３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８４
▼
Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
Childproof Door Locks Remote Transmitter You can open and close all power
windows from outside the vehicle
LEVER PANIC UNLOCK/ with the key. With the remote
BUTTON WINDOW- transmitter, you can open the
OPEN
BUTTON windows. Refer to Power Windows
on page 95 .

ProCarManuals.com
UNLOCK − Press this button once

to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors.
TRUNK LOCK
RELEASE BUTTON
BUTTON The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) will
come on when you press the
The childproof door locks are On all models except U.S. DX UNLOCK button. If you do not open
designed to prevent children seated LOCK − Press this button once to any door, the light stays on for about
in the rear from accidentally opening lock all doors. Some exterior and 30 seconds, then fades out. If you
the rear doors. Each rear door has a interior lights will flash. You cannot relock the doors with the remote
lock lever near the edge. With the lock it if any door is not fully closed transmitter before 30 seconds have
lever in the LOCK position, the door or key is in the ignition switch. elapsed, the light will go off
cannot be opened from the inside immediately.
regardless of the position of the lock On EX model
tab. To open the door, pull the lock When you push LOCK twice within 5
tab up and use the outside door seconds, you will hear a beep to
handle. verify that the security system has
set.
81
０４／０５／２７１７：５６：３７３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８５
▼
Remote Transmitter
You cannot lock the doors with the On all models except DX Remote Transmitter Care
remote transmitter if any door is not PANIC − Press this button for Avoid dropping or throwing the
fully closed or the key is in the about 1 second to attract attention; transmitter.
ignition switch. the horn will sound and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds. Protect the transmitter from
On all models except DX To cancel panic mode, press any extreme temperature.
ProCarManuals.com
If you unlock the doors with the other button on the remote
remote transmitter, but do not open transmitter, or turn the ignition Do not immerse the transmitter in
any of the doors within 30 seconds, switch to ON (II). any liquid.
the doors automatically relock. On
the EX model, the security system TRUNK − Press this button for If you lose a transmitter, the
will also set. about 1 second to open the trunk. replacement needs to be
You cannot open the trunk if the key reprogrammed by your dealer.
To open the trunk, push the Trunk is in the ignition switch.
Release button for about 1 second.
The trunk will not open if the key is

in the ignition switch.
82
０４／０５／２７１７：５６：４８３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８６
▼
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter Battery

If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible. BATTERY

ProCarManuals.com
Battery type: CR1616
SCREW TAB
To replace the battery: 3. Inside the transmitter, separate

the inner cover from the keypad
1. Remove the screw at the base of by releasing the two tabs on the
the transmitter with a small cover.
Phillips-head screwdriver.
4. Remove the old battery from the
2. Separate the transmitter by prying back of the inner cover, and note
its middle seam with your the polarity. Make sure the
fingernail. polarity of the new battery is the
same (＋ side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
83
０４／０５／２７１７：５６：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８７
▼
Remote Transmitter
As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
ProCarManuals.com
interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
84
０４／０６／０１１４：１２：３０３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８８
▼
Trunk
MASTER KEY
Pull

ProCarManuals.com
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER MASTER KEY
You can open the trunk in any of To close the trunk, press down on To protect items in the trunk when
three ways: the trunk lid. you need to give the key to someone
else:
Pull up on the trunk release lever See page 171 for cargo loading and
located to the left of the driver’s weight limit information. Keep the 1. Lock the trunk release lever with
seat. trunk lid closed at all times while the master key. Also make sure
Use the master key to open the driving to avoid damaging the lid, the trunk pass-through cover is
trunk lock. The valet key does not and to prevent exhaust gas from locked (see page 93 ).
work in this lock. getting into the interior. See Carbon
Press and hold the trunk release Monoxide Hazard on page 52 . 2. Give the person the valet key.
button on the remote transmitter.
(all models except U.S. DX)
85
０４／０５／２７１７：５７：１３３１ＳＤＡ６２０００８９
▼
Trunk
Emergency Trunk Opener To open the trunk, push the release

lever to the left.
Parents should decide if their

children should be shown how to use
this feature.
ProCarManuals.com
As a safety feature, your vehicle has

a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
86
０４／０５／２７１７：５７：２１３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９０
▼
Seat Heaters
After the seat reaches a comfortable Follow these precautions whenever

temperature, select LO by pushing you use the seat heaters:
the back of the switch. This will keep
the seat warm. Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
In HI, the heater turns off when the large amounts of current from the

ProCarManuals.com
seat gets warm, and turns back on battery.

after the seat’s temperature drops.
If the engine is left idling for an
In LO, the heater runs continuously. extended period, do not use the
It does not cycle with temperature seat heaters even on the LO
changes. setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
On EX-V6 model and EX-L model
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag system, there is
no heater in the passenger’s seat-
back. The ignition switch must be
ON (II) to use the heaters.
87
０４／０５／２７１７：５７：３５３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９１
▼
Seats
Power Seat Adjustment The 4-cylinder EX model without

On EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 models leather interior has a power height
See pages 13 − 14 for important safety adjustment for the driver’s seat. All
information and warnings about how to other seat adjustments in this model
properly position seats and seat-backs. are manual.
ProCarManuals.com
The controls for the adjustable The DX and LX models have manual
driver’s power seat are on the seat adjustments (see next page).
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the power seat with the Moves the seat The front passenger’s seat in all
ignition switch in any position. Make forward and backward. 4-cylinder models, and the LX V-6
all seat adjustments before you start models adjust manually.
driving.
Moves the front of the
Moving the long horizontal switch seat up or down and
adjusts the seat bottom in several the rear of the seat up
directions. The seat bottom adjusts or down.
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the Raises or lowers the
seat back angle. seat.
On EX-V6 model
The passenger’s seat also has power Adjusts the seat-back
adjustable controls. angle forward or
backward.
88
０４／０５／２７１７：５７：４４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９２
▼
Seats
Driver’s Lumbar Support Front Seat Adjustments

On EX, EX-L and EX-V6 models

ProCarManuals.com
To adjust the seat forward and To change the seat-back angle, pull
To change the lumbar support, move backward, pull up on the lever under up on the lever on the outside of the
the lever on the right side of the the seat cushion’s front edge. Move seat bottom.
seat-back forward or backward. the seat to the desired position and
Keep moving the lever forward or release the lever. Try to move the
backward until you find a suitable seat to make sure it is locked in
position. position.
89
０４／０５／２７１７：５７：５４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９３
▼
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height Driver’s Seat Power Height Head Restraints
Adjustment Adjustment
ProCarManuals.com
RELEASE BUTTON
See page 15 for important safety

On DX and LX models On EX model information and a warning about how to
The height of your driver’s seat is The height of your driver’s seat is properly position the head restraints.
adjustable. To raise the seat bottom, power adjustable. Pull up on the
repeatedly pull up the lever on the switch to raise the seat. Push it down Your vehicle is equipped with head
outside of the seat cushion. To lower to lower the seat. restraints in all seating positions to
the seat, push the lever down help protect you and your
repeatedly. Make all adjustments before you passengers from whiplash and other
start driving. injuries.
90
０４／０５／２７１７：５８：０２３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９４
▼
Seats
They are most effective when you Folding Rear Seat

adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the MASTER KEY
center of the restraint.
The front and rear head restraints

ProCarManuals.com
adjust for height. You need both

hands to adjust the restraint. Do not
attempt to adjust it while driving. To GUIDE
raise it, pull upward. To lower the
restraint, push the release button
and push the restraint down.
The back of the rear seat folds down, When storing cargo, you can move
giving you direct access to the trunk. the rear center shoulder belt out of
The seat-back can be released from the way by removing the belt from
inside the vehicle or inside the trunk. the guide.
To fold down the seat-back from

inside the vehicle, insert the master
key in the lock on the rear shelf.
Turn the key clockwise, pull down
the top of the seat-back, then release
the key.
91
０４／０５／２７１７：５８：０９３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９５
▼
Seats
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are Never drive with the seat-back
positioned in front of the rear seat- folded down and the trunk lid open.
back whenever the seat-back is in its See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
upright position. page 52 .
Make sure all items in the trunk, or

ProCarManuals.com
items extending through the opening

Pull into the back seat, are secured.
Loose items can fly forward and
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See Carrying Cargo on page
170 .
To release the seat-back from inside

the trunk, pull the release loop under
the trunk panel.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it

firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.
92
０４／０５／２７１７：５８：１７３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９６
▼
Seats
Trunk Pass-through Cover For security, this cover can be

locked and unlocked only with the
KEY CYLINDER KNOB master key. To lock the cover, insert
the key and turn it clockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and

ProCarManuals.com
the trunk lid open.

See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 52 .
LID
On all models except DX

The trunk pass-through cover can be
opened from either side; it folds
forward onto the center armrest.
Open the cover by sliding the knob
downward and pushing or pulling on
the cover. To close the cover, swing
it up and push firmly on the top.
Make sure it latches properly.
Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the pass-
through are secured.
93
０４／０５／２７１７：５８：２６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９７
▼
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push or pull the adjustment knob

right, left, up, or down to move the
mirror.
4. When you finish, turn the

adjustment knob to the center
ProCarManuals.com
(off) position. This turns off the

TAB adjustment knob to keep your
settings.
Keep the inside and outside mirrors ADJUSTMENT KNOB

clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before On all models except DX
you start driving.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
The outside mirrors are manually
adjustable. 2. Turn the adjustment knob to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
The inside mirror has day and night side).
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
94
０４／０５／２７１７：５８：３６３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９８
▼
Mirrors, Power Windows
Power Mirror Heaters Power Windows

On all Canadian models except DX
Closing a power window on
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.

ProCarManuals.com
Make sure your passengers are

away from the windows before
closing them.
DRIVER’S WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

AUTO − To open the driver’s
SWITCH window, push the window switch
firmly down, then release it. To stop
the window from going all the way
The outside mirrors are heated to Turn the switch to ON (II) to down, pull back on the window
remove fog and frost. With the raise or lower any window. To switch briefly.
ignition switch in the ON (II) open the window, push the
position, turn on the heaters by switch down and hold it. To close the driver’s window fully,
pressing the button. The indicator in Release the switch when you pull back the window switch firmly,
the button comes on as a reminder. want the window to stop. Pull then release it. To stop the window
Press the button again to turn the from going all the way up, push
heaters off. back on the switch and hold it down on the window switch briefly.
to close the window.
95
０４／０５／２７１７：５８：４４３１ＳＤＡ６２０００９９
▼
Power Windows
To open or close the driver’s window AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s If your vehicle’s battery is
partially, push down or pull back on window senses any obstacle while it disconnected or goes dead, or the
the window switch lightly and hold it. is closing automatically, it will driver’s window fuse is removed, the
The window will stop when you reverse direction and then stop. To AUTO function will be disabled. The
release the switch. close the window, remove the power window system needs to be
obstacle, then use the window switch reset after reconnecting the battery
ProCarManuals.com
The passenger windows cannot be again. or installing the fuse.

raised or lowered if the MAIN switch
is OFF. Keep the MAIN switch off Auto reverse stops sensing when the 1. Start the engine. Push down and
when you have children in the window is almost closed. You should hold the driver’s window switch
vehicle so they do not injure always check that all passengers and until the window is fully open.
themselves by operating the objects are away from the window
windows unintentionally. before closing it. 2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
96
０４／０５／２７１７：５８：５６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１００
▼
Power Windows
Does not apply to U.S. DX Power Window Control

The power window system has a key- Operations UNLOCK BUTTON
off delay function. The windows will Opening the Windows with the
still operate for up to ten minutes Remote Transmitter
after you turn off the ignition switch. You can open all of the windows
Opening either front door cancels from the outside with the remote Open

ProCarManuals.com
the delay function. You must turn transmitter.

the ignition switch to ON (II) again Close
before you can raise or lower the 1. Press the UNLOCK button once
windows. to unlock the driver’s door.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a

second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors unlock, and all Opening/Closing the Windows with
four windows start to open. To the Key
stop the windows, release the On all models except U.S. DX
button. You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock.
3. To open the windows further,
press the button again. To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
You cannot close the windows with lock.
the remote transmitter.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
97
０４／０５／２７１７：５９：１０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１０１
▼
Power Windows, Moonroof
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and Moonroof To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
hold it. All four windows start to press and hold the center button
open. To stop the windows, ( ). To close the moonroof,
release the key. press and hold the upper button
( ). To open the moonroof,
4. To open the windows further, turn press and hold the lower button
ProCarManuals.com
and hold the key again. ( ). Release the button when

the moonroof gets to the desired
To close: position. Make sure everyone’s
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door hands are away from the moonroof
lock. before opening or closing it.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise, MOONROOF SWITCH

then release it.
On EX, EX-L and EX-V6 models Opening or closing the
3. Turn the key counterclockwise The moonroof has two positions: it moonroof on someone’s hands
again, and hold it. All four can be tilted up in the back for or fingers can cause serious
windows start to close. To stop the ventilation, or it can be slid back into injury.
windows, release the key. the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the Make sure all hands and fingers
4. To close the windows further, turn moonroof. The ignition switch must are clear of the moonroof
and hold the key again. be ON (II). before opening or closing it.
98
０４／０５／２７１７：５９：１６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１０２
▼
Moonroof, Parking Brake
The moonroof has a key-off delay Parking Brake NOTICE: Driving the vehicle with the
function. You can still open and close parking brake applied can damage the
the moonroof for up to ten minutes rear brakes and hubs.
after you turn off the ignition switch.
The key-off delay function cancels as
soon as you open either front door.

ProCarManuals.com
You must then turn the ignition

switch to ON (II) to operate the
moonroof.
If you try to open the moonroof in PARKING BRAKE LEVER

below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can To apply the parking brake, pull the
damage the moonroof panel or motor. lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake light on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released with the engine running
(see page 58 ).
99
０４／０５／２７１７：５９：２３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１０３
▼
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror All models except the DX have

lighted vanity mirrors.
The lights come on when you pull up

the cover.
ProCarManuals.com
To use the sun visor, pull it down. To use a vanity mirror on the back of
You can also use the sun visor at the the sun visor, pull up the cover.
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
100
０４／０５／２７１７：５９：３６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１０４
▼
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light On LX models

Push on the spotlight lenses to turn
DOOR ACTIVATED DOOR ACTIVATED the light on and off.
Individual Interior Lights

The courtesy lights in the front

ON
ProCarManuals.com
doors and around the ignition switch

come on when you open any door.
After you close the door, the ignition
OFF switch light stays on for several
seconds.
COURTESY LIGHT
The ceiling lights have a three or On EX and EX-V6

two-position switch; ON (for three- The front ceiling light also contains
position), Door Activated, and OFF. two spotlights. Push the spotlight
In the Door Activated (center or left) lenses to turn them on and off.
position, the lights come on when
you: The courtesy light between the
Open any door. spotlights comes on when you turn
Unlock the doors with the key or the parking lights on. To adjust its
remote transmitter. brightness, turn the Select/Reset
After all doors are closed tightly, the knob on the instrument panel.
light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
101
０４／０５／２７１７：５９：４１３１ＳＤＡ６２００１０５
▼
Interior Convenience Items
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT/ FRONT DOOR POCKET/ CENTER POCKET/

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET BEVERAGE HOLDER COIN POCKET/
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ProCarManuals.com
REAR DOOR POCKET
GLOVE BOX
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET＊＊: For some types
102
０４／０５／２７１７：５９：５２３１ＳＤＡ６２００１０６
▼
Beverage Holders Console Compartment

Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage

ProCarManuals.com
holders when you close the doors.

Use only resealable containers in the
door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the

upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior. CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
Accessory Power Sockets To open the console compartment, You can put small items in the tray
These sockets are intended to supply pull up on the right lever and lift the located in the console compartment
power for 12 volt DC accessories armrest. lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
that are rated 120 watts or less (10 left lever and lift up the armrest.
amps). To close, lower the armrest, and
None of the sockets will power an push it down until it latches. On models except DX, the tray in the
automotive type cigarette lighter console compartment has a coin
element. When more than one holder.
socket is being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).
103
０４／０５／２７１８：００：０１３１ＳＤＡ６２００１０７
▼
Sunglasses Holder Glove Box
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
ProCarManuals.com
belt.
Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
On all models except DX Open the glove box by pulling the

To open the sunglasses holder, push handle to the left. Close it with a firm
on the front edge. Make sure the push. Lock or unlock the glove box
holder is closed while you are driving. with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when

the parking lights are on.
104
０４／０５／２７１８：００：０８３１ＳＤＡ６２００１０８
▼
Main Menu
Features
On all models except 4-cylinder DX and Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 106 Caring the Tape and Player...... 140
LX models Dual Temperature Control ........... 115 Playing the XMTM Satellite
Climate Control Sensors ............... 117 Radio ....................................... 141
Your Honda has an anti-theft audio Playing the Radio ........................... 118 Satellite Digital Radio ................ 141
system that requires a code number To Play the Radio ...................... 120 To Play XMTM Satellite Radio.... 142
to enable it. To Select a Station ..................... 120 To Select a Channel................... 142
ProCarManuals.com
Adjusting the Sound .................. 123 Satellite Radio Signals ............... 144
The security system helps to dis- Radio Frequencies ..................... 124 Receiving Satellite Radio
Features
courage vandalism and theft of your Radio Reception ......................... 124 Service..................................... 145
Honda. Playing a CD ................................... 126 Steering Wheel Controls .............. 147
Playing a CD, CD Changer ........... 128 Radio Theft Protection.................. 148
The heating and air conditioning To Play a CD .............................. 128 Setting the Clock ........................... 149
systems in your Honda provide a To Stop Playing a CD ................ 131 Security System ............................. 150
comfortable driving environment in Removing CDs from the Cruise Control ................................ 151
all weather conditions. Changer .................................. 131 HomeLink Universal
Operating the Optional CD Transceiver................................. 154
The standard audio system has Changer .................................. 132
many features. This section de- CD Player Error Messages .......... 133
scribes those features and how to CD Changer Error Messages ...... 134
use them. Protecting your CDs...................... 135
General Information .................. 135
Protecting CDs........................... 135
Playing a Tape ................................ 136
To Play a Tape ........................... 138
To Stop Playing a Tape ............. 138
Tape Search Functions ............. 139
105
０４／０５／２７１８：００：１４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１０９
▼
Vents, Heating, and A/C
All models except EX-L and EX-V6 EX-L and EX-V6 Models without Navigation System
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE FAN SPEED TEMPERATURE

FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON CONTROL DIAL INDICATOR CONTROL DIAL
(DRIVER’S SIDE) (PASSENGER’S SIDE)
ProCarManuals.com
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS AIR
REAR WINDOW CONDITIONING
DEFOGGER BUTTON
BUTTON AUTO BUTTON
AIR
CONDITIONING WINDSHIELD REAR WINDOW
BUTTON DEFROST BUTTON OFF BUTTON DEFOGGER BUTTON
MAX A/C BUTTON MODE BUTTONS DUAL BUTTON WINDSHIELD

DEFROST BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
106
０４／０５／２７１８：００：２０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１０
▼
EX-L and EX-V6 Models with Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles Only)
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
ProCarManuals.com
Features
A/C BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING ICONS
MODE ICONS
FAN CONTROL ICONS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS (PASSENGER’S SIDE)
BUTTONS (DRIVER’S SIDE)
AUTO BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
OFF BUTTON WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON
107
０４／０５／２７１８：００：３３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１１
▼
Heating and Cooling On EX-L and EX-V6 models with the For vehicles with the navigation
Air conditioning is optional for U.S. navigation system, you can manually system, press the DUAL button. The
DX model. Your Honda dealer can select the fan speed by pressing the indicator will come on. The driver
install a Honda air conditioning A/C button next to the display and and passenger can each select the
system that is designed to fit in your then, pressing the fan control icons. temperature control buttons (▲ or
vehicle. ▼) to the desired setting.
ProCarManuals.com
Temperature Control
What Each Control Does On all models except EX-L and EX-V6 When the indicator in the DUAL
For EX-L and EX-V6 with navigation with Navigation System button is off, both sides adjust to the
system, see page 117 for Automatic Turning this dial clockwise increases same temperature.
Climate Control and Manual the temperature of the airflow.
Operations information.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Fan Control The driver and passenger can select
On all models except EX-L and independent temperature settings by
EX-V6, turn this dial to increase or selecting the DUAL button.
decrease the fan speed airflow.
For vehicles without navigation
On EX-L and EX-V6 models without system, push the DUAL button.
the navigation system, you can When the indicator in the button is
manually select the fan speed by lit, turn the dials to adjust the
pressing the fan control buttons. The temperature.
fan speed is represented by vertical
bars in the display.
108
０４／０５／２７１８：００：４６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１２
▼
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button EX-L and EX-V6 Recirculation Button

On all models except EX-L and When you turn the A/C off, the When the recirculation indicator is
EX-V6, this button turns the air system cannot regulate the inside on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
conditioning on and off. The temperature if you set the sent throughout the system again.
indicator in the button is on when temperature control buttons below When the indicator is off, air is
the A/C is on. the outside temperature. brought in from the outside of the
ProCarManuals.com
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).

On vehicles without the navigation
Features
system, press the A/C button to turn The outside air intakes for the
on the A/C. You will see A/C ON or heating and cooling system are at
A/C OFF in the display. the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
On vehicles with the navigation
system, press the A/C button to view The system should be left in Fresh
the display. Touching ‘‘ON’’ or Air mode under almost all conditions.
‘‘OFF’’ in the display turns the air Keeping the system in Recirculation
conditioning on and off. You will see mode, particularly with the A/C off,
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to Fresh Air
mode.
Rear Window Defogger Button

This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 73 ).
109
０４／０５／２７１８：０１：０５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１３
▼
Mode Control When you select or , MAX A/C Button

Use the mode control buttons or the system automatically switches to On LX, EX, LX-V6 and Canadian DX
icons to select the vents the air flows Fresh Air mode and turns on the models
from. Some air will flow from the A/C. In these modes, the A/C stays The system automatically
dashboard corner vents in all modes. on with the indicator off. turns on the A/C and switches to
Recirculation mode. Air flows from
ProCarManuals.com
Air flows from the center When you select , the system the center and side vents in the
and corner vents in the dashboard. automatically switches to Fresh Air dashboard.
mode.
Airflow is divided between Ventilation
the vents in the dashboard and the On EX-L and EX-V6 model The flow-through ventilation system
floor vents. For Vehicles without Navigation System draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
Air flows from the floor Each time you press the MODE through vents near the rear window.
vents. button, the display shows the mode
selected. 1. Set the temperature to the lower
Airflow is drivided between limit.
the floor vents and the defroster For Vehicles with Navigation System 2. Make sure the A/C is off.
vents at the base of the windshield. 3. Select and Fresh Air mode.
Press the A/C button to view the 4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Air flows from the defroster display, then touch any of the mode
vents at the base of the windshield. icons on the display.
110
０４／０５／２７１８：０１：２０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１４
▼
Using the Heater Using the A/C EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
The heater uses engine coolant to Air conditioning places an extra load 1. Press the A/C button, the Manual
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it on the engine. Watch the engine Operation A/C screen will appear.
will be several minutes before you coolant temperature gauge (see page 2. Select the ON icon on the display.
feel warm air coming from the 65 ). If it moves near the red zone, 3. Select the desired temperature
system. turn off the A/C until the gauge and MODE selections. If the
ProCarManuals.com
reads normally. outside air is humid, select the

Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation Recirculation mode. If the outside
Features
System Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
1. Select . System
When you select , the system 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the If the interior is very warm, you can
automatically switches to the ON button. The indicator in the cool it down more rapidly by partially
Fresh Air mode. button comes on when a fan speed opening the windows, turning on the
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. is selected. A/C, and setting the fan to
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with 2. Make sure the temperature maximum speed in Fresh Air mode.
the temperature control dial. control dial or button is set to
maximum cool. On all models except EX-L and EX-V6
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System 3. Select . To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
1. Press the A/C button, the manual 4. If the outside air is humid, select 1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
operation of A/C screen will Recirculation mode. If the outside 2. Select the MAX A/C mode.
appear. air is dry, select Fresh Air mode. The system automatically turns on
2. Select the desired mode and fan 5. Set the fan to the desired speed. the A/C, selects and
speed icons on the display. switches to Recirculation mode.
3. Adjust for warmth with the 3. Make sure the temperature
temperature buttons (▲ or ▼). control dial is all the way to the left.
111
０４／０５／２７１８：０１：３４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１５
▼
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows
moisture from the air. When used in windows: 1. Select . The system
combination with the heater, it automatically switches to Fresh
makes the interior warm and dry. 1. Set the fan to the desired speed or Air mode and turns on the A/C.
high for faster defrosting. The A/C indicator will not come
ProCarManuals.com
1. Turn the fan on. 2. Select . When you select on in U.S. vehicles.
2. Turn on the air conditioning. , the system automatically 2. Select .
3. Select and Fresh Air mode. switches to Fresh Air mode and 3. Set the fan and temperature
4. Adjust the temperature control turns on the A/C. The A/C controls to maximum level.
dial or buttons to your preference. indicator will not come on in U.S.
vehicles. To clear the windows faster, you can
This setting is suitable for all driving 3. Set the temperature control dial or close the dashboard corner vents by
conditions whenever the outside buttons so the airflow feels warm. rotating the wheel below it. This will
temperature is above 32°F (0°C). 4. Select to help clear the send more warm air to the
rear window. windshield defroster vents. Once the
5. To increase airflow to the windshield is clear, select the Fresh
windshield, close the side vents. Air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C stays on. For your safety, make sure you have
Press the A/C button to turn it off. a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
112
０４／０５／２７１８：０１：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１６
▼
Automatic Climate Control Press the AUTO button. The system automatically selects the
On EX-L and EX-V6 models Without Navigation System: Set the proper mix of conditioned and/or
The automatic climate control desired temperature by turning heated air to raise or lower the
system adjusts the fan speed and the Temperature Control dial. You interior temperature to the
airflow levels to maintain the interior will see AUTO in the system’s temperature you selected.
temperature you select. display.
ProCarManuals.com
With Navigation System: Set the If you set the temperature to its
On models with Navigation System desired temperature by pressing lowest limit, (Lo) or its highest limit,
Features
In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s the ▲ to raise the temperature or (Hi) the system runs at full cooling
interior temperature is ▼ to lower the temperature. The or heating only. It does not regulate
independently regulated for the selected temperature will show in the interior temperature.
driver and passenger. If the driver’s the upper display.
side of the vehicle is getting too In cold weather, the fan will not
much sun, the system will adjust to a come on automatically until the
lower temperature. heater starts to develop warm air.
Dual Temperature Control − When

the indicator in the Dual button is on,
the driver’s side and passenger’s side
temperature can be controlled
independently (see page 115 ).
113
０４／０５／２７１８：０１：５６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１７
▼
Manual Operation To Turn Everything Off If you press OFF, the Climate
You can manually select various Press the OFF button. However, a Control system shuts off completely.
functions of the automatic climate lack of airflow can cause the −Keep the system completely off
control system when it is in AUTO. windows to fog up. You should keep for short periods only.
All other features remain the fan on at all times so stale air and −To keep stale air and mustiness
automatically controlled. moisture do not build up in the from collecting, you should have
ProCarManuals.com
interior and cause fogging. the fan running at all times.

EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation
System With Navigation System
Manual selections will cause the When the Climate Control System is
word AUTO in the display to go out. turned OFF, the temperature in the
upper display will also turn off.
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
If you press the A/C button next to Except for EX and EX-V6 models
the display, the manual selections Turning the fan speed and
will show in the display. Manual temperature control dials all the way
selection will cause the light in the to the left shuts off the system
AUTO button to turn off. completely.
114
０４／０５／２７１８：０２：０７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１８
▼
Dual Temperature Control
On EX-L and EX-V6 models Without Navigation System

Without Navigation System
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the passenger.
With Navigation System DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
ProCarManuals.com
Your vehicle has four temperature TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE

control buttons, two for the driver, CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL
Features
and two for the passenger. DUAL BUTTON
The driver’s side and the passenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials or buttons With Navigation System
when the green indicator in the
DUAL button is lit.
Temperature Control Dials/Buttons

Push AUTO or . The selected
temperatures appear in the upper
display. For vehicles with navigation
system when the indicator in the DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
DUAL button is off, you can adjust TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
both sides to the same temperature CONTROL BUTTONS CONTROL BUTTONS
by adjusting the driver’s side DUAL BUTTON
temperature control dial or buttons.
CONTINUED
115
０４／０５／２７１８：０２：１４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１１９
▼
Dual Temperature Control
To set the driver’s side temperature

to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then turn the driver’s control dial or DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
press the ▲ or ▼ buttons on the
driver’s side. To set the passenger’s
ProCarManuals.com
side to a different value than the

driver’s, turn the passenger’s control
dial or press the ▲ or ▼ buttons on
the passenger’s side. You can adjust
the passenger’s side without
pressing the DUAL button first.
When you set the temperature to its

lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as or .
116
０４／０５／２７１８：０２：２０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２０
▼
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ProCarManuals.com
Features
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
117
０４／０５／２７１８：０２：２７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２１
▼
Playing the Radio
DX and LX Models EX and LX-V6 Models without Navigation System
STEREO INDICATOR STEREO INDICATOR

ProCarManuals.com
AM/FM SCAN BUTTON AM/FM

BUTTON BUTTON
A.SEL A.SEL
BUTTON BUTTON
TUNE BAR TUNE BAR
PRESET
BARS
SEEK BAR SEEK BAR
PRESET BARS SOUND BUTTON SCAN BUTTON SOUND BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB PWR/VOL KNOB
118
０４／０５／２７１８：０２：３４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２２
▼
Playing the Radio
EX-L, EX-V6 Models EX-L, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

without Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles Only)
STEREO INDICATOR
STEREO INDICATOR PRESET BARS
ProCarManuals.com
UPPER
AM/FM DISPLAY
Features
BUTTON
A.SEL AM/FM
BUTTON BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TUNE SCAN BUTTON
BAR BUTTON
PRESET
SEEK BAR ICONS
SEEK BAR
SCAN BUTTON SOUND BUTTON TUNE/
SOUND
PWR/VOL KNOB KNOB
PWR/VOL AUDIO SCAN SOUND ICON
KNOB SELECT ICON
ICON
119
０４／０５／２７１８：０２：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２３
▼
Playing the Radio
To Play the Radio To Select a Station SCAN − The SCAN function

The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to samples all stations with strong
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected signals on the selected band. To
Turn the system on by pushing the band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO activate it, press the SCAN button,
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM SELECT, and the preset bars or then release it. You will see SCAN in
button. Adjust the volume by turning icons. the display. The system will scan for
ProCarManuals.com
the PWR/VOL knob. a station with a strong signal. When

TUNE − Use the TUNE bar or it finds one, it will stop and play that
For Vehicles with Navigation System knob to tune the radio to a desired station for about five seconds.
Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAY frequency. Press the side of the
button will also turn on the system. bar or turn the knob to the right to If you do nothing, the system will
tune to a higher frequency, and the then scan for the next strong station
The band and frequency that the side or turn the knob to the left and play it for five seconds. When it
radio was last tuned to is displayed. to tune to a lower frequency. plays a station you want to listen to,
To change bands, press the AM/FM press the SCAN button again.
button. On the FM band, ST will be SEEK − The SEEK function
displayed if the station is broadcast- searches up and down from the
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on current frequency to find a station
AM is not available. with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
XM Satellite Radio information is bar, then release it.
available on page 141 .
120
０４／０５／２７１８：０２：５４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２４
▼
Playing the Radio
Preset − Each preset bar or icon 3. Pick the preset number (1 − 6) The preset frequencies will be lost if
can store one frequency on AM, and you want for that station. Press your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
two frequencies on FM. the left or right side of the bar or disconnected, or the radio fuse is
icon and hold it until you hear a removed.
1. Select the desired band, AM or beep.
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
ProCarManuals.com
two frequencies with each preset 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total

bar or icon. of six stations on AM and twelve
Features
For Vehicles with Navigation System stations on FM.
Push the AUDIO DISPLAY button
to view the preset icons.
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN

function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
121
０４／０５／２７１８：０２：５９３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２５
▼
Playing the Radio
AUTO SELECT − If you are If you do not like the stations Auto
traveling far from home and can no Select has stored, you can store
longer receive your preset stations, other frequencies on the preset bars
you can use the Auto Select feature or icons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
to find stations in the local area. SCAN function to find stations, then
store them in the preset bars or
ProCarManuals.com
Press the A. SEL button or touch the icons as described previously.

Auto Select icon. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go To turn off Auto Select, press the A.
into scan mode for several seconds. SEL button or Auto Select icon. This
It stores the frequencies of six AM, restores the presets you originally set.
and twelve FM stations in the preset
bars (1 − 6) or icons. You will see a
‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset
bar or icon if Auto Select cannot find
a strong station for every preset bar
or icon.
122
０４／０５／２７１８：０３：１２３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２６
▼
Playing the Radio
Adjusting the Sound For Vehicles without Navigation System The system will automatically return
Press the SOUND button or icon, or Each mode is shown in the display as the display to the selected audio
press the TUNE knob repeatedly to it changes. Turn the VOLUME knob mode about five seconds after you
display the Bass (BAS), Treble or touch the icon to adjust the stop adjusting a mode. On vehicles
(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader setting to your liking. When the level with navigation system, touch the
(FAD) settings. On vehicles with reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’ RETURN icon to go back to the
ProCarManuals.com
navigation system, touch the in the display. audio screen.

SOUND icon or press the TUNE
Features
knob. For Vehicles with Navigation System
(U.S. vehicles only)
Balance/Fader − These two Touch the arrows next to the BAS or
modes adjust the strength of the TRE icons. The adjustment shows
sound coming from each speaker. you the current setting.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back Touch the left or right bars on the
strength. sound grid. Balance is equalized
when the vertical lines are centered
Treble/Bass − Use the TRE/BAS on the grid.
modes to adjust the tone to your
liking. Touch the front or rear bars on the
sound grid. The fader is equalized
On Vehicles with Navigation System when the horizontal lines are
If you want to adjust the sound while centered on the grid.
the radio/CD is playing, push the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, then touch
the SOUND icon in the display.
123
０４／０５／２７１８：０３：２２３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２７
▼
Playing the Radio
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
ProCarManuals.com
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
FM band: as you get farther away from its
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
Radio stations on the AM band are volume becoming weaker, and the
assigned frequencies at least ten station drifting in and out. If you are
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
Stations on the FM band are see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
assigned frequencies at least 0.2 and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
Stations must use these exact completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
frequencies. It is fairly common for the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
stations to round-off the frequency in are close to.
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
124
０４／０５／２７１８：０３：２９３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２８
▼
Playing the Radio
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
ProCarManuals.com
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
125
０４／０５／２７１８：０３：３８３１ＳＤＡ６２００１２９
▼
Playing a CD
DX and LX Models EX, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

(U.S. Vehicles Only)
SCAN/RPT BUTTON
CD RDM UPPER DISPLAY
BUTTON BUTTON
PRESET
ProCarManuals.com
BAR CD BUTTON
CD LOAD
SEEK/SKIP INDICATOR
BAR SCAN AUDIO
CD SLOT BUTTON DISPLAY
BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP
EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 Models BAR
without Navigation System
CD BUTTON PRESET BAR RPT BUTTON PWR/VOL

KNOB
SEEK/SKIP RDM
BAR BUTTON CD SLOT CHANGE
DISC
EJECT BUTTON
BUTTON LOAD
BUTTON TRACK DISC RANDOM
CD SLOT RPT RPT ICON
LOAD ICON ICON
BUTTON CD LOAD INDICATOR
CD LOAD INDICATOR EJECT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB
126
０４／０５／２７１８：０３：４６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３０
▼
Playing a CD
EX-L, EX-V6 Models EX-L, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

without Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles Only)
UPPER DISPLAY
CD BUTTON RPT BUTTON

ProCarManuals.com
CD BUTTON
AUDIO
Features
DISPLAY
BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON SEEK BAR
EJECT
BUTTON PWR/VOL
SEEK/SKIP KNOB
BAR CD SLOT
LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT

CHANGE
CD LOAD DISC
INDICATOR LOAD BUTTON
BUTTON
RANDOM
PWR/VOL KNOB ICON
TRACK
RPT DISC RPT EJECT
ICON ICON BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
127
０４／０６／０１１４：１２：４２３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３１
▼
Playing a CD, CD Changer
To Play a CD DX, LX, and Si Models in Canada For vehicles with Satellite Radio
To load or play CDs, the ignition Insert a CD into the CD slot. The To listen to satellite radio when a CD
switch must be in the ACCESSORY drive will pull the CD in the rest of is playing, press the CD/AUX XM
(I) or ON(II) position. the way to play it. When the system button.
reaches the end of the disc, it will
You operate the CD player/CD return to the beginning and play the To play the tape when a CD is
ProCarManuals.com
changer with the same controls used disc again. playing, insert a tape in the player
for the radio. To select the CD (optional). If a tape is in the player,
player/CD changer, press the CD To play the radio when a CD is press the AUX button. Press the CD
button. The number of the track playing, press the AM/FM button. button again to switch back to the
playing is shown in the display. With Press the CD button again to switch CD player. The cassette player is
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and back to the CD player. optional on all U.S. models.
track numbers are displayed. The
system will continuously play a CD If you turn the system off while a CD
until you change modes. is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
Avoid using discs with adhesive labels. will begin playing where it left off.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
128
０４／０５／２７１８：０４：０４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３２
▼
For Vehicle with in-dash CD Changer You can also load a CD into an empty On vehicles with in-dash CD changer
1. Press the LOAD button until you position while a CD is playing. Select To select a different disc, press the
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the the empty position (the disc number appropriate side of a preset bar
display. indicator is not highlighted) and (1−6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC −)
2. The disc number for an empty press the appropriate preset bar or to select the previous disc or Preset
position is highlighted and the red touch a disc icon. The current CD 6 (DISC ＋) to select the next disc in
ProCarManuals.com
light starts blinking. stops playing and starts the loading sequence. On vehicles with
3. Insert the disc into the CD slot sequence. The CD just loaded will navigation system, touch the
Features
when the green CD load indicator play. appropriate disc icon or press the ▲
comes on. Insert it only about or ▼ side of the CH/DISC bar. If
halfway; the drive will pull it in the You operate the CD changer with you select an empty position in the
rest of the way. You will see the same controls used for the radio. CD changer, the system will try to
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CD The numbers of the disc and track load the CD in the next available slot.
load indicator turns red and blinks playing are shown in the display. On
as the CD is loaded. vehicles with navigation system,
4. When the CD load indicator turns these numbers also appear in the
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the upper display.
screen again, insert the next CD in
the slot.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all
six positions are loaded. If you are
not loading all six positions, the
system begins playing the last CD
loaded.
129
０４／０５／２７１８：０４：１５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３３
▼
For Vehicles without Navigation System RANDOM − Press to play the EX-L, EX-V6 Models with Navigation
SEEK/SKIP − Push the to tracks in random order. You will see System
play the next track on the disc. Push RDM in the display. Press the RDM To use the controls, press the
the once to replay the track in button again to return to normal play. AUDIO DISPLAY button, the control
play, press twice to replay the icons will appear on the screen.
previous track. SCAN − The SCAN function
ProCarManuals.com
To remove rapidly within a track, samples all the tracks on the TRACK SCAN − Press the icon or
press and hold the , or the selected disc in the order they are SCAN button, to get a 10 second
button. recorded. To activate it, press and sampling of each track on the
release the SCAN button. You will current CD. Press the icon or button
REPEAT − Press to continuously see SCAN in the display, and you will again to turn it off.
replay a track. You will see RPT in get a 10 second sampling of each
the display. Press the RPT button track on the selected CD. Press the DISC SCAN − Touch to get a 10
again to turn it off. SCAN button again to get out of the second sampling of the first song of
system. each disc in the CD changer. Touch
the icon again to turn it off.
TRACK RPT − Touch to

continuously play the same song on
the CD. Press the icon again to stop
the function.
130
０４／０５／２７１８：０４：２６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３４
▼
DISC RPT − Touch the icon to EX-L, EX-V6 Models Removing CDs from the Changer
continuously replay the current CD. Press the AM/FM or XM/CD EX, EX-V6 Models
Touch again to turn it off. button to switch to the radio or To remove the disc currently playing,
satellite radio while a CD is playing. press the EJECT button. When a
TRACK RDM − Touch the icon to Press the CD button again to play disc is removed from a slot, the
play the current CD in random order. the CD. system automatically begins the load
ProCarManuals.com
Touch again to stop. sequence so you can load another

If a tape is in the optional tape player, CD in that position. If you do not
Features
CH DISC − Selects an icon and press the AUX button to switch to remove the disc from the changer
plays the disc. the tape while a CD is playing. Press within 15 seconds, the system
the CD button again to switch back returns to the previous mode (AM/
To Stop Playing a CD to the CD player. FM or satellite radio). The disc will
On models with CD player or changer reload into the system and will
Press the eject button ( ) to If you turn the system off while a CD remain there in a pause mode.
remove the CD. If you eject the CD, is playing, the CD will stay in the
but do not remove it from the slot, drive. When you turn the system To remove a different disc from the
the system will automatically reload back on, the CD will begin playing changer, first select it with the
the CD after 15 seconds and put it in where it left off. appropriate preset bar or icon. When
pause mode. To begin playing, press that CD begins playing, press the
the CD button. eject button. Continue pressing the
EJECT button to remove all the discs
from the changer.
131
０４／０５／２７１８：０４：３４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３５
▼
Operating the Optional CD Load the desired CDs in the On LX model, if there are no CDs in
Changer magazine, and load the magazine in the changer, the display will flash,
DX, LX, LX-V6, and EX models the changer according to the and you will have to select another
An optional six or eight disc CD instructions that came with the unit. mode.
changer is available for your vehicle
from your Honda dealer. To select the CD changer, press the
ProCarManuals.com
This disc changer uses the same CD button. The disc and track
controls used for the in-dash CD numbers will be displayed. To select
player/changer or the radio. a different disc, use Preset 5 (DISC
−), for a previous disc; or Preset 6
(DISC ＋), to select the next disc in
sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the

magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
132
０４／０５／２７１８：０４：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３６
▼
CD Player Error Messages
If you see an error message in the

display while playing a CD, find the Error Message Cause Solution
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
the vehicle to your dealer. or
FOCUS Error Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
ProCarManuals.com
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Features
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Mechanical Error If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
or
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
133
０４／０５／２７１８：０４：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３７
▼
CD Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the

display while playing a CD, find the Error Message Cause Solution
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
the vehicle to your dealer. FOCUS Error Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
ProCarManuals.com
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Mechanical Error Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your dealer.
No CD in the CD Insert CDs.
Changer
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
134
０４／０６／０１１４：１２：５５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３８
▼
Protecting Your CDs
General Information Protecting CDs

When using CD-R discs, use only When a CD is not being played, store
high quality CDs labeled for audio it in its case to protect it from dust
use. and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
When recording a CD-R, the sunlight and extreme heat.
ProCarManuals.com
recording must be closed for it to

be used by the system. To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
Wipe across the CD from the center
CD-RW discs will not work in this to the outside edge.
unit.
A new CD may be rough on the
Play only standard round CDs. inner and outer edges. The small
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never
drive or cause other problems. can flake off and fall on the re- touch either surface. Do not place
cording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
Handle your CDs properly to skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination
prevent damage and skipping. See these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
this page. and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play
pencil or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in

the CD player or the magazine.
135
０４／０５／２７１８：０５：１６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１３９
▼
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
DX and LX Models EX, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
RPT
CD/AUX BUTTON
BUTTON
ProCarManuals.com
AUDIO
SEEK/SKIP DISPLAY
BAR BUTTON
PRESET BARS PWR/VOL KNOB
CD/AUX
BUTTON
EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 Models

SEEK/SKIP CH/DISC
CD/AUX BAR BAR
BUTTON RPT
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
PROG ICON RPT ICON NR ICON
136
０４／０５／２７１８：０５：２３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４０
▼
All U.S. EX Leather Interior Models All U.S. EX Leather Interior Models with Navigation System
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION UPPER

INDICATOR DISPLAY
ProCarManuals.com
CD/SAT RADIO
Features
RPT BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
BUTTON AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
SEEK BAR CH/DISC

BAR
SEEK BAR
TUNE/
PWR/VOL SOUND
KNOB KNOB
PROG ICON RPT ICON NR ICON
137
０４／０５／２７１８：０５：３２３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４１
▼
To Play a Tape Dolby＊ noise reduction turns on To Stop Playing a Tape

Optional on all U.S. models when you insert a tape. The To remove the tape, press the
The ignition switch must be in indicator will light in the EJECT button on the cassette player.
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Make display. If the tape was not recorded If you want to turn the player off,
sure the open side of the tape is in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the press the PWR/VOL knob or turn
facing right, then insert the tape Preset 4 (NR) side of the preset bar off the ignition. The tape will remain
ProCarManuals.com
most of the way into the slot. The or touching the NR icon. Dolby in the drive.
system will pull the tape in the rest remains off until you press the When you turn the system back on,
of the way, and begin to play it. preset bar or the icon again. the tape player will be in pause mode.
Press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)
＊
The tape direction indicator will light Dolby noise reduction side of the preset bar or touch the
to show you which side of the tape is manufactured under license from PROG icon on vehicles with
playing. The ▲ indicates the side Dolby laboratories licensing navigation system to resume play.
you inserted upward in now playing. Corporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and the
If you want to play the other side, double-D symbol are trademarks To switch to the radio or CD player
press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) of the Dolby Laboratories while a tape is playing, press the
side of the preset bar or press the Licensing Corporation. AM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/
AUDIO DISPLAY button and touch AUX XM button. To change back to
the PROG icon. When the player the tape player, push the CD/AUX
reaches the end of the tape, it will button or CD/AUX XM button.
automatically reverse direction and
play the other side.
138
０４／０５／２７１８：０５：４０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４２
▼
Tape Search Functions SKIP − Press side to find the Vehicles with Navigation System
FF/REW − To rewind the tape, beginning of the current song or If you see the error message
push the Preset 1 (REW) side of the passage. Press side to find the ‘‘ ’’ on the display, press the
preset bar or the upper side (▲) of beginning of the next song or tape eject button to remove the tape
the CH DISC bar. You will see REW passage. When the system reaches from the unit. Make sure the tape is
in the display. To fast forward the the beginning of a song or passage, it not damaged. If the tape will not
ProCarManuals.com
tape, push the Preset 2 (FF) side of begins to play it. eject or the error message stays on
the preset bar. You will see FF dis- after the tape ejects, take your
Features
played. Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3 REPEAT − Press the RPT button vehicle to your Honda dealer.
side of the bars or the lower side or icon to continuously play a song or
(▼) of the CH DISC bar to take the passage. You will see RPT displayed.
system out of rewind or fast forward. The track will repeat until you press
the RPT button or icon again.
EX and EX-V6 with Navigation System
FF/REW − To rewind the tape NOTE: The SKIP and REPEAT
push the upper side (▲) of the CH functions use silent periods on the
DISC bar. To fast forward the tape, tape to find the end of a song or
push the lower side (▼) of the CH passage. These features may not
DISC bar. Press either side of the work if there is almost no gap
PROG icon in the audio display to between selections, a high noise
take the system out of rewind or fast level, or a silent period in the middle
forward. of a selection.
139
０４／０５／２７１８：０５：４７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４３
▼
Caring for the Tape and Player If you do not clean the tape player If the tape is loose, tighten it by
The tape player picks up dirt and regularly, it may eventually become turning the hub with a pencil or your
oxides from the tape. This impossible to remove the finger. If the label is peeling off,
contamination builds up over time contamination with a normal remove it or it could cause the tape
and causes the sound quality to cleaning kit. Your dealer has a to jam in the player. Never try to
degrade. To prevent this, you should cleaning kit available. insert a warped or damaged tape in
ProCarManuals.com
clean the player after every 30 hours the player.

of use. Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or Store tapes in their cases to protect
jam the drive. them from dust and moisture. Never
place tapes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects

into the tape player.
140
０４／０５／２７１８：０５：５７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４４
▼
Playing the XMTM Satellite Radio
Satellite Digital Radio All U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 Models All U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 Models
EX-L and EX-V6 Models without Navigation System with Navigation System
Your vehicle is capable of receiving CATEGORY/CHANNEL
XMTM Satellite Radio anywhere in the CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODE INDICATOR
United States except Hawaii, Alaska, MODE INDICATOR SAT RADIO AUDIO
and Canada. BUTTON DISPLAY
ProCarManuals.com
SAT RADIO DISP BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON SCAN
XM is a registered trademark of BUTTON
Features
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available in U.S.

models only.
TUNE
SEEK/ BAR
SKIP/
BAR PRESET SEEK/
BARS SKIP/
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON PWR/VOL TUNE
KNOB KNOB
PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET

SCAN ICON ICONS
MODE ICON
141
０４／０５／２７１８：０６：１１３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４５
▼
To Play XMTM Satellite Radio DISP − TUNE −

The ignition must be in the Vehicles with Navigation System Vehicles with Navigation System
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Press and release this button to Turn the TUNE knob to change
Turn the system on: change the display. The display will channels. Turn the knob right for
change in the following sequence: higher numbered channels and left
Vehicles with Navigation System channel name, channel number, for lower numbered channels.
ProCarManuals.com
Push any of the following: PWR/ category, artist name, and music title. Vehicles without Navigation System
VOL knob, the CD/AUX XM, or Press the TUNE bar to change
AUDIO button. channel selections. Press for
higher numbered channels and
Vehicles without Navigation System for lower numbered channels.
Push any of the following: PWR/
VOL knob or the CD/AUX XM
button.
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust

the volume.
To Select a Channel
When in the satellite radio mode,
you can use any of three methods to
find channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP
(CATEGORY), and SCAN.
142
０４／０５／２７１８：０６：２１３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４６
▼
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)− The SCAN − The SCAN function For Vehicles with Navigation System
SEEK/SKIP function selects the samples all channels for 5 seconds. Once your XM channels are preset,
various categories in XM, such as To activate the function, push the pressing the CH DISC button will
Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc. SCAN button. Push it again to get select your preset channels.
Push the to change the out of the sequence.
category forward. Push the to
ProCarManuals.com
change the category backward. To Preset − Each preset icon or button

search for channels within a can store one channel in XM1 and
Features
category, turn the TUNE knob one in XM2.
clockwise or press the TUNE bar 1. Push the CD/AUX XM button.
. (You will see XM1 or XM2.)
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired channel.
3. Pick a preset icon or button and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on XM1 and XM2.
CONTINUED
143
０４／０５／２７１８：０６：２７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４７
▼
Satellite Radio Signals

Satellite radio receives signals from
Signal may be two satellites to produce clear, high-
blocked by quality digital reception. It offers
mountains or
large obstacles many channels in several categories.
to the south. Along with a large selection of
ProCarManuals.com
different types of music, satellite

radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio
display.
The XM satellites are in orbit over

the equator; therefore, objects south
SATELLITE of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
are more likely to be blocked by tall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
GROUND
REPEATER
144
０４／０５／２７１８：０６：４０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４８
▼
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: Receiving Satellite Radio Service
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly If your XM Radio service has expired
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for or you purchased your vehicle from
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s a previous owner, you can listen to a
authority to operate the equipment. sampling of the broadcasts available
Driving on an east/west road with on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ProCarManuals.com
a mountain on the south side of ignition switch in the ACCESSORY

the road. (I) or ON (II) position, push the
Features
Driving on the north side of a PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
large commercial truck on an system and press the CD/AUX XM
east/west road button. A variety of music types and
Driving in the tunnels styles will play.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff or hill to the south
of you
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you
There may be other geographic

situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
CONTINUED
145
０４／０５／２７１８：０６：４６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１４９
▼
If you decide to purchase XM While awaiting activation, make sure

Satellite Radio service, contact XM your vehicle remains in an open area
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at with good reception. Once your
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
them your radio I.D. number and or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display
your credit card number. and you will be able to listen to XM
ProCarManuals.com
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will

To get your XM Satellite radio ID continue to send an activation signal
number: to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’ from activation request. If the
appears in the display. Your ID service has not been activated after
number will appear in the display. 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
After you have registered with XM

Radio, keep your audio system in the
SAT Radio mode while you await
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
146
０４／０５／２７１８：０６：５５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５０
▼
Steering Wheel Controls
On EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and EX-V6 models The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a CD, the system
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next
MODE BUTTON or bottom of the button and hold it track each time you press the top
until the desired volume is reached, (＋) of the CH button. Press the
then release it. bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
ProCarManuals.com
The MODE button changes the it twice to return to the previous

mode. Pressing the button track. You will see the disc and track
Features
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, numbers in the display.
XM1, XM2, CD, or a tape.
If you are playing a tape in the
If you are listening to the radio, use optional cassette player, press the
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON the CH button to change stations. top (＋) of the CH button to advance
Each time you press the top (＋) of to the next selection. Press the
Three controls for the audio system the button, the system goes to the bottom (−) to go back to the
are mounted in the steering wheel next preset station on the band you previous selection. The system
hub. These let you control basic are listening to. Press the bottom senses a silent period, then resumes
functions without removing your (−) to go back to the previous playing.
hand from the wheel. station.
147
０４／０５／２７１８：０７：０４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５１
▼
Radio Theft Protection
On EX and EX-V6 models If your vehicle’s battery is discon- digits the same way.
Your vehicle’s audio system will nected or goes dead, the audio
disable itself if it is disconnected system will disable itself. If this If you make a mistake entering the
from electrical power for any reason. happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the code, do not start over; complete the
To make it work again, you must frequency display the next time you five-digit sequence, then enter the
enter a specific five-digit code using turn on the system. Use the preset correct code. You have ten tries to
ProCarManuals.com
the preset bars or the TUNE knob. buttons to enter the five-digit code. enter the correct code. If you are
Because there are hundreds of The code is on the radio code card unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
number combinations possible from included in your Owner’s Manual kit. must then leave the system on for 1
the five-digit, making the system When it is entered correctly, the hour before trying again.
work without knowing the exact radio will start playing.
code is nearly impossible. If the code card is lost, a dealer can
If your vehicle is equipped with a access your code with the your radio’s
You should have received a card that navigation system, press and release serial number. To access the serial
lists your audio system code number the TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’ number, turn the radio on. It must
and serial number. It is best to store appears on the display. display ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the radio
this card in a safe place at home. In off. Push the preset 1, preset 6, and
addition, you should write the audio If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code, power buttons at the same time, then
system’s serial number in this press and release the TUNE knob to quickly release.
Owner’s Manual. store it.
You will have to store your favorite
If you lose the card, you must obtain If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in your stations on each side of the preset
the code number from a dealer. To code, turn the TUNE knob left or bars (1 − 6) after the system begins
do this, you will need the system’s right until the first digit is displayed. working. Your original settings were
serial number. Press and release the TUNE knob to lost when power was disconnected.
store it. Enter the remaining three
148
０４／０５／２７１８：０７：１６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５２
▼
Setting the Clock
On models without Navigation System EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 Models

If your vehicle’s battery is without Navigation System shown
disconnected or goes dead, you will DIGITAL CLOCK
need to set the clock.
Press and hold the SOUND button.

ProCarManuals.com
Change the hours by pressing the

until you hear a beep. The displayed
Features
time begins to blink. Press on the H PRESET BARS
(Preset 4) side of the bar until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minutes by pressing the
M (Preset 5) side of the bar until the
numbers advance to the desired time. SOUND BUTTON
When you are finished, press the
SOUND button again to set the time. You can quickly set the time to the For example:
nearest hour. Pressing and holding 1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
the SOUND button, then pressing 1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
the R (Preset 6) side of the bar sets
the clock back to the previous hour. On models with Navigation System
If the displayed time is after the half Refer to the Navigation System
hour, the clock sets the clock Owner’s Manual to set up the time.
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
149
０４／０５／２７１８：０７：２５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５３
▼
Security System
On EX, EX-L, LX-V6 and Canadian LX SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR With the system set, you can still
models open the trunk with the master key
The security system helps to protect or the remote transmitter without
your vehicle and valuables from theft. triggering the alarm. The alarm will
The horn sounds and a combination sound if the trunk lock is forced, or
of headlights, parking lights, side the trunk is opened with the trunk
ProCarManuals.com
marker lights and taillights flashes if release handle.

someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This The security system will not set if
alarm continues for two minutes, the hood, trunk, or any door is not
then the system resets. To reset an fully closed. If the system will not set,
alarming system before the two check the Door Monitor on the
minutes have elapsed, unlock either instrument panel (see page 61 ), to
front door with the key or the Once the security system is set, see if the doors and trunk are fully
remote transmitter. opening any door (without using the closed. Since it is not part of the
key or the remote transmitter), the monitor display, manually check the
The security system automatically hood, or the trunk will cause it to hood.
sets 15 seconds after you lock the sound. It also sounds if the radio is
doors, hood, and trunk. For the removed from the dashboard or the Do not attempt to alter this system
system to activate, you must lock the wiring is cut. or add other devices to it.
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
light on the instrument panel starts
blinking immediately to show you
the system is setting itself.
150
０４／０５／２７１８：０７：３３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５４
▼
Cruise Control
On all models except U.S. DX Using the Cruise Control 3. Press and release the DECEL/
Cruise control allows you to maintain SET button on the steering wheel.
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON The CRUISE CONTROL light on
without keeping your foot on the the instrument panel comes on to
accelerator pedal. It should be used show the system is now activated.
for cruising on straight, open
ProCarManuals.com
highways. It is not recommended for

city driving, winding roads, slippery
Features
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
CANCEL DECEL/SET RES/ACCEL

Improper use of the cruise BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
control can lead to a crash.
1. Push in the Cruise Control Master
Use the cruise control only Button on the steering wheel. The
when traveling on open CRUISE MAIN light on the
highways in good weather. instrument panel comes on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising

speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
151
０４／０５／２７１８：０７：４４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５５
▼
Cruise Control
The cruise control may not hold the Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac- Tap the brake or clutch pedal
set speed when you are going up and celerate to the desired cruising lightly with your foot. The
down hills. If your speed increases speed and press the DECEL/SET CRUISE CONTROL light on the
going down a hill, use the brakes to button. instrument panel will go out.
slow down. This will cancel the When the car slows to the desired
cruise control. To resume the set To increase the speed in very speed, press the DECEL/SET
ProCarManuals.com
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. small amounts, tap the RES/ button.
The CRUISE CONTROL light on the ACCEL button. Each time you do
instrument panel will come back on. this, your vehicle will speed up Even with the cruise control turned
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). on, you can still use the accelerator
Changing the Set Speed pedal to speed up for passing. After
You can increase the set cruising You can decrease the set cruising completing the pass, take your foot
speed in any of these ways: speed in any of these ways: off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL Press and hold the DECEL/SET
button. When you reach the button. Release the button when Resting your foot on the brake or
desired cruising speed, release the you reach the desired speed. clutch pedal will cause the cruise
button. control to cancel.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
152
０４／０５／２７１８：０７：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５６
▼
Cruise Control
Cancelling the Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed Pressing the Cruise Control Master
You can cancel the cruise control in When you push the CANCEL button, Button turns the system off and
any of these ways: or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the erases the previous cruising speed.
system will remember the
Tap the brake or clutch pedal. previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
ProCarManuals.com
Push the CANCEL button on the above 25 mph (40 km/h) then press
steering wheel. and release the RES/ACCEL button.
Features
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
Push the Cruise Control Master comes on. The vehicle will accelerate
Button. to the same cruising speed as before.
153
０４／０５／２７１８：０８：０３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５７
▼
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
On EX-V6 model HomeLink stores the code in a Important Safety Precautions

The HomeLink Universal permanent memory. There should Always refer to the opening
Transceiver built into your vehicle be no need to retrain HomeLink if instructions and safety information
can be programmed to operate up to your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is that came with your garage door
three remote controlled devices disconnected. opener or other equipment you
around your home, such as garage intend to operate with HomeLink. If
ProCarManuals.com
doors, lighting, or home security If your garage door opener was you do not have this information,
systems. manufactured before April 1982, you contact the manufacturer of the
may not be able to program equipment.
General Information HomeLink Universal Transceiver to
If you are training HomeLink to operate it. They do not have a safety
operate a garage door or gate, you feature that causes the motor to stop
should unplug the motor for that and reverse if an obstacle is detected
device during training. Repeatedly during closing, increasing the risk of
pressing the remote control button injury.
could burn out the motor.
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson ControlsTM.
154
０４／０５／２７１８：０８：１１３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５８
▼
Training HomeLink If you are training the second or

Before you begin − If you just third buttons, go directly to Step 1.
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in 1. Unplug the garage door opener
HomeLink before, you should erase motor from the electrical outlet.
any previously learned codes before
2. Hold the end of the garage door
ProCarManuals.com
training the first button. To do this,

opener remote 2 to 5 inches from
press and hold the two outside
Features
HomeLink. Make sure you are not
buttons on the HomeLink
blocking your view of the red
Transceiver for about 20 seconds, or
indicator in HomeLink.
until the red light flashes. Release
the buttons, then go to step 1. 3. Press and hold the remote trans-
mitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), it may be
because your remote transmitter
stops transmitting after a short
time. Go to step 4. CONTINUED
155
０４／０５／２７１８：０８：２０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１５９
▼
4. Press and hold the remote trans- 6. Push and hold the HomeLink Training With a Rolling Code
mitter button and one of the button for a few seconds, then System
HomeLink buttons at the same watch the red indicator on For security purposes, newer garage
time. While continuing to hold HomeLink. door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
the HomeLink button, press and If the indicator stays on or or variable code. Information from
release the remote transmitter flashes slowly, repeat steps 2 the remote control and the garage
button every 2 seconds. door opener are needed before
ProCarManuals.com
thru 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink can operate the garage
If the indicator flashes door opener.
HomeLink begins to flash rapidly for 2 seconds, then
slowly at first, then rapidily, stays on, you have a rolling
release both buttons, and go to The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
code system. Go to procedure trains HomeLink to the
step 5. ‘‘Training With a Rolling proper garage door opener code.
If the red indicator in Code System’’ (see page 156). The following procedure
HomeLink continues to flash synchronizes HomeLink to the
slowly (does not begin to flash 7. Repeat these steps to train the garage door opener so it sends and
rapidly), repeat steps 2 thru 4. other two HomeLink buttons to receives the correct codes.
operate any other compatible
5. Plug in the garage door opener remotely-controlled devices
motor, then test the HomeLink around your home (lighting,
button by pushing it for about 1 automatic gate, security system,
second. etc.).
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not
work, go to step 6.
156
０４／０５／２７１８：０８：３０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６０
▼
1. Make sure you have properly TRAINING BUTTON 4. Press and hold the button on
completed the ‘‘Training HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
HomeLink’’ procedure.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink
2. Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
garage door opener unit. The This should turn off the training
ProCarManuals.com
location will vary, depending on light on the garage door opener

the manufacturer. unit. (Some systems may require
Features
you to press the button up to three
times.)
6. Press the HomeLink button again.

It should operate the garage door.
3. Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on, then release it. The indicator
may blink, or come on and stay on.
You then have approximately 30
seconds to complete the following
steps.
157
０４／０５／２７１８：０８：３９３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６１
▼
Erasing Codes If a standard transmitter was As required by the FCC:

To erase the codes stored in all three previously programmed, the This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two indicator will stay on for about FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red light 25 seconds. following two conditions: (1) This device
begins to flash, then release the 2. Once the HomeLink indicator
may not cause harmful interference, and
buttons. begins to flash slowly, continue (2) this device must accept any
ProCarManuals.com
interference received, including

You should erase all three codes to hold the HomeLink button,
interference that may cause undesired
before selling the vehicle. and follow steps 3 thru 6 under
operation.
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see
Retraining a Button page 155).
If you want to retrain a programmed Changes or modifications not expressly
button for a new device, you do approved by the party responsible for
Customer Assistance
not have to erase all button memory. compliance could void the user’s
If you have problems with training
You can replace the existing memory authority to operate the equipment.
the HomeLink Wireless Control
code for that button using this
System, or would like information on This device complies with Industry
procedure:
home products that can be operated Canada Standard RSS-210.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink by HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Operation is subject to the following two
button to be trained until the On the Internet, go to www. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
HomeLink indicator begins to homelink.com. interference, and (2) this device must
flash slowly. accept any interference that may cause
If a rolling code transmitter HomeLink is a registered undesired operation of the device.
was previously programmed, trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
the indicator will flash rapidly
for 2 seconds, then stay on
for about 23 seconds.
158
０４／０５／２７１８：０８：４４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６２
▼
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 160

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 160
gasoline to use, and how to check Service Station Procedures .......... 162
the levels of important fluids. You Refueling..................................... 162
also need to know how to properly Opening and Closing the
store luggage or packages. The Hood ........................................ 163
ProCarManuals.com
information in this section will help Oil Check .................................... 165

you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check .............. 166
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ................................ 167
read the information in this section Improving Fuel Economy ......... 167
Before Driving
first. Accessories and Modifications .... 168
Accessories................................. 168
Modifying Your Vehicle............ 169
Additional Safety Precautions .. 169
Carrying Cargo .............................. 170
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
or on a Roof Rack .................. 172
Carrying Items in the
Passenger Compartment ...... 172
159
０４／０６／０１１４：１３：０７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６３
▼
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation We recommend quality gasoline

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate containing detergent additives that
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump help prevent fuel system and engine
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 86 or higher. Use deposits.
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause
During this period: a persistent, heavy metallic rapping In addition, in order to maintain good
ProCarManuals.com
noise that can lead to engine damage. performance, fuel economy, and
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid emissions control, we strongly
acceleration. On vehicles with manual transmission recommend, in areas where it is
You may hear a knocking noise from available, the use of gasoline that
Do not change the oil until the the engine if you drive the vehicle at does NOT contain manganese-based
scheduled maintenance time. low engine speed (below about 1,000 fuel additives such as MMT.
rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,
Avoid hard braking for the first raise the engine speed by shifting to
200 miles (300 km). a lower gear.
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these

recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
160
０４／０５／２７１８：０９：０３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６４
▼
Fuel Recommendation
Some gasoline today is blended with If you notice any undesirable For further important fuel-related
oxygenates such as ethanol or operating symptoms, try another information, please refer to your
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to service station or switch to another Quick Start Guide.
operate on oxygenated gasoline brand of gasoline.
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
by volume and up to 15 percent
ProCarManuals.com
MTBE by volume. Do not use

gasoline containing methanol.
Before Driving
161
０４／０５／２７１８：０９：１５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６５
▼
Service Station Procedure
Refueling 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.

You may hear a hissing sound as
Gasoline is highly flammable pressure inside the tank escapes.
and explosive. You can be The fuel fill cap is attached to the
Push burned or seriously injured fuel filler with a tether. Put the
when handling fuel. attachment on the fuel fill cap into
ProCarManuals.com
the slit on the fuel fill door.

Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flames 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
away. nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
Handle fuel only outdoors. not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
Wipe up spills immediately. some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
to the gas pump. even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
2. To open the fuel fill door, push vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
down on the lever located to the system. The system helps keep
left of the driver’s seat. fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
TETHER problem, consult your dealer.
FUEL FILL CAP
162
０４／０５／２７１８：０９：２５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６６
▼
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood
until it clicks at least three times.
If you do not properly tighten the HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
cap, the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp may come on (see page
259 ).
ProCarManuals.com
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until

it latches.
Before Driving
To Open the Hood: 2. Put your fingers under the front
1. Park the vehicle, and set the edge of the hood near the center.
parking brake. Pull the hood Slide your hand to the left until
release handle located under the you feel the hood latch handle.
lower left corner of the dashboard. Push this handle up to release it.
The hood will pop up slightly. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,

or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
163
０４／０５／２７１８：０９：３６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６７
▼
cm) above the fender, then let it is securely latched.

drop. Make sure it is securely
SUPPORT ROD latched.
ProCarManuals.com
3. 4-cylinder models
Pull the support rod out of its clip
and insert the end into the hole on 6-cylinder models
the front of the hood near the Lift the hood up most of the way.
center. The hydraulic supports will lift it
up the rest of the way and hold it
To Close the Hood: up.
4-cylinder models
Lift it up slightly to remove the To Close the Hood:
support rod from the hole. Put the Lower it to about a foot (30 cm)
support rod back into its holding clip. above the fender, then press down
Lower the hood to about a foot (30 firmly with your hands. Make sure it
164
０４／０６／０１１４：１３：１７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６８
▼
Oil Check
ProCarManuals.com
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Before Driving
DIPSTICK DIPSTICK
4-cylinder models (orange handle) 6-cylinder models (orange loop) 4-cylinder models
Wait a few minutes after turning the 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean 4. Remove the dipstick again and
engine off before you check the oil. cloth or paper towel. check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
1. Remove the dipstick (orange 3. Insert it all the way back in its hole. marks.
handle).
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Oil on page 212 .
165
０４／０５／２７１８：０９：５４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１６９
▼
Engine Coolant Check

RESERVE TANK MAX RESERVE TANK
ProCarManuals.com
MAX
UPPER MARK MIN
LOWER MARK
6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models MIN
Look at the coolant level in the Refer to Owner’s Maintenance

radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is Checks on page 201 for information
between the MAX and MIN lines. If about checking other items on your
it is below the MIN line, see Adding vehicle.
Engine Coolant on page 217 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
166
０４／０５／２７１８：１０：０３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７０
▼
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy Always drive in the highest gear

Always maintain your vehicle possible.
according to the maintenance
schedule. See Owner’s Try to maintain a constant speed.
Maintenance Checks (see page Every time you slow down and
201 ). speed up, your vehicle uses extra
ProCarManuals.com
fuel. Use the cruise control when

For example, an underinflated tire appropriate.
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. Combine several short trips into
Before Driving
one.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds The air conditioning puts an extra
weight and rolling resistance. load on the engine which makes it
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
mileage and reduces the chance of ventilation when possible.
corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid

acceleration, abrupt cornering and
hard braking use more fuel.
167
０４／０５／２７１８：１０：１３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７１
▼
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
you make any modifications or add modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
any accessories, be sure to read the vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
following information. performance, and cause a performance.
ProCarManuals.com
crash in which you can be hurt

Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Honda accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 265 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding proper operation.
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
Although aftermarket accessories When properly installed, cellular contact your dealer for assistance.
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and If possible, have your dealer
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should inspect the final installation.
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s
handling and stability (see next page computer controlled systems, such Do not install accessories on the
for additional information). as your airbags and anti-lock brakes. side pillars or across the rear
windows as these may interfere
with proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
168
０４／０５／２７１８：１０：２５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７２
▼
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires Do not attach hard objects on or
Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of near a front door. If a side airbag
or replacing components with your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and or a side curtain airbag inflates, a
aftermarket components could other systems. cup holder or other hard object
seriously affect your vehicle’s attached on or near the door could
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or be propelled inside the vehicle and
ProCarManuals.com
any other part of your vehicle’s hurt someone.

Some examples are: safety features can make the
Lowering the vehicle with an systems ineffective. Do not place any objects over or
aftermarket suspension kit that replace the outside edge of a front
Before Driving
significantly reduces ground If you plan to modify your vehicle, seat-back. This could prevent the
clearance can allow the consult your dealer. airbag from inflating properly.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which Additional Safety Precautions
could cause the airbags to deploy. Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Any object
Raising your vehicle with an attached to or placed on the covers
aftermarket suspension kit can marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
affect the handling and stability. center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
Aftermarket wheels, because they interfere with the proper operation
are a universal design, can cause of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
excessive stress on suspension inflate, the objects could be
components. propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
169
０４／０５／２７１８：１０：３３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７３
▼
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

DOOR POCKET storage areas:
CENTER POCKET
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets

ProCarManuals.com
Trunk, including the back seats

when folded down
Center pocket
Console compartment (on some

models)
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
CONSOLE make it unsafe. Before carrying any
COMPARTMENT type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET GLOVE BOX
170
０４／０６／０１１４：１３：２９３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７４
▼
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits Steps for Determining Correct Load (850 − 750 (5 × 150) = 100lbs.)
The maximum load for your vehicle Limit:
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure 5. Determine the combined weight
includes the total weight of all 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the of luggage and cargo being loaded
occupants, cargo, and accessories, combined weight of occupants and on the vehicle. That weight may
and the tongue load if you are towing cargo should never exceed 850 not safely exceed the available
ProCarManuals.com
a trailer. lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard. cargo and luggage load capacity in
[The placard is on the driver’s Step 4.
doorjamb.]
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
Before Driving
Overloading or improper 2. Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will
loading can affect handling and of the driver and passengers that be transferred to your vehicle.
stability and cause a crash in will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
which you can be hurt or killed. how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of
Follow all load limits and other the driver and passengers from your vehicle (see page 190 ).
loading guidelines in this 850 pounds or 395 kilograms.
manual.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs. CONTINUED
171
０４／０５／２７１８：１０：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７５
▼
Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the If you carry large items that Carrying Items in the Passenger
vehicle, all passengers and prevent you from closing the trunk Compartment
accessories must not exceed the lid, exhaust gas can enter the Store or secure all items that could
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating passenger area. To avoid the be thrown around and hurt
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight possibility of carbon monoxide someone during a crash.
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label poisoning, follow the instructions
ProCarManuals.com
on the driver’s doorjamb. on page 52 . Be sure items placed on the floor

behind the front seats cannot roll
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on If you carry any items on a roof under the seats and interfere with
a Roof Rack rack, be sure the total weight of the driver’s ability to operate the
Distribute cargo evenly on the the rack and the items does not pedals or seat.
floor of the trunk, placing the exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
heaviest items on the bottom and Keep the glove box closed while
as far forward as possible. Tie If you use an accessory roof rack, driving. If it is open, a passenger
down items that could be thrown the roof rack weight limit may be could injure their knees during a
about the vehicle during a crash or lower. Refer to the information that crash or sudden stop.
sudden stop. came with your roof rack.
172
０４／０５／２７１８：１０：５７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７６
▼
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 174

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 175
conditions, and how to operate the Manual Transmission.................... 176
manual and automatic transmissions. Recommended Shift Points ...... 177
It also includes important Engine Speed Limiter ............... 177
information on parking your vehicle, Automatic Transmission............... 178
ProCarManuals.com
the braking system, the Traction Shift Lever Position

Control System, and facts you need Indicators ................................ 178
if you are planning to tow a trailer. Shifting ........................................ 178
Engine Speed Limiter ............... 180
Shift Lock Release ..................... 181
Parking ............................................ 183
Driving
Braking System.............................. 184
Brake System Design................ 184
Brake Wear Indicators .............. 184
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ............ 185
Activating the Anti-lock
Brakes ................................. 185
ABS Indicator ......................... 185
Traction Control System............... 187
TCS ON/OFF Switch................ 188
TCS Activation Indicator .......... 188
Towing a Trailer ............................ 190
173
０４／０５／２７１８：１１：０９３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７７
▼
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 6. Check the seat adjustment (see 11. When you start the engine, check
and adjustments before you drive pages 88 to 90 ). the gauges and indicators in the
your vehicle. instrument panel (see pages 58 to
7. Check the adjustment of the 67 ).
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and pages 94 and 95 ).
ProCarManuals.com
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,

or ice. 8. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 74 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
9. Make sure the doors are securely
3. Check that the trunk is fully closed and locked.
closed.
10. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire your passengers have fastened
looks low, use a gauge to check its their seat belts (see page 16 ).
pressure.
5. Check that any items you may be

carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
174
０４／０５／２７１８：１１：２２３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７８
▼
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition key to the 6. If the engine fails to start, press
START (III) position. Do not hold the accelerator pedal all the way
2. In cold weather, turn off all the key in START (III) for more down and hold it there while
electrical accessories to reduce than 15 seconds at a time. If the starting to clear flooding. Return
the drain on the battery. engine does not start right away, to step 5 if the engine does not
pause for at least 10 seconds start.
ProCarManuals.com
3. Manual Transmission: before trying again.

Push the clutch pedal down all the NOTICE: The engine is harder to start
way. NOTICE: The immobilizer System in cold weather. Also, the thinner air
protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet
Automatic Transmission: improperly-coded key (or other device) (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.
Make sure the shift lever is in is used, the engine’s f uel system is
Driving
Park. Press on the brake pedal. disabled. See Immobilizer System on
page 77 .
5. If the engine does not start within

15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
175
０４／０５／２７１８：１１：２８３１ＳＤＡ６２００１７９
▼
Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift

into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into Rapid slowing or speeding-up
Reverse with the vehicle moving. can cause loss of control on
Push down the clutch pedal, and slippery surfaces. If you crash,
pause for a few seconds before you can be injured.
ProCarManuals.com
shifting into Reverse, or shift into

one of the forward gears for a Use extra care when driving on
moment. This stops the gears so slippery surfaces.
they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get

extra braking from the engine by
The manual transmission is syn- shifting to a lower gear. This extra
chronized in all forward gears for braking can help you maintain a safe
smooth operation. When shifting up speed and prevent your brakes from
or down, make sure you push the overheating while going down a
clutch pedal down all the way, shift steep hill. Before downshifting,
to the next gear, and let the pedal up make sure the engine speed will not
gradually. When you are not shifting, go into the tachometer’s red zone in
do not rest your foot on the clutch the lower gear. Downshift one gear
pedal. This can cause your clutch to at a time.
wear out faster.
176
０４／０５／２７１８：１１：３５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８０
▼
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

Drive in the highest gear that lets If you exceed the maximum speed
the engine run and accelerate for the gear you are in, the engine
smoothly. This will give you the best speed will enter into the tachometer’s
fuel economy and effective emis- red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
sions control. The following shift the engine cut in and out. This is
ProCarManuals.com
points are recommended: caused by a limiter in the engine’s

computer controls. The engine will
Shift up Normal acceleration run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
1st to 2nd 15 mph (25 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h) Before downshifting, make sure the
Driving
3rd to 4th 40 mph (65 km/h) engine will not go into the
4th to 5th 50 mph (80 km/h) tachometer’s red zone.
177
０４／０５／２７１８：１１：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８１
▼
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators If the malfunction indicator lamp To shift from any position, press the
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’ release button on the side of the
indicator, there is a problem in the shift lever to move it. You cannot
automatic transmission control shift out of Park when the ignition
system. Avoid rapid acceleration and switch is in the LOCK (0) or
have the transmission checked by ACCESSORY position (I).
ProCarManuals.com
your dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from: Do this:
Shifting P to R Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
SHIFT LEVER R to P
N to R Press the release button.
D3 to 2
These indicators between the tacho- 2 to 1
meter and speedometer show which 1 to 2
position the shift lever is in. 2 to D3
D3 to D
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a D to N Move the lever.
few seconds when you turn the D to D3
ignition switch to ON (II). If it N to D
flashes while driving (in any shift R to N
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.
178
０４／０５／２７１８：１１：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８２
▼
Park (P) − This position mechani- Reverse (R) − Press the brake Drive (D3) −This position is similar
cally locks the transmission. Use pedal and press the release button to to D, except only the first three
Park whenever you are turning off or shift from Park to Reverse. To shift gears are selected instead of all five.
starting the engine. To shift out of from Reverse to Neutral, come to a Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly
Park, you must press on the brake complete stop and then shift. terrain, or to provide engine braking
pedal and have your foot off the when going down a steep hill. D3 can
ProCarManuals.com
accelerator pedal. Press the release Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you also keep the transmission from
button on the side of the shift lever need to restart a stalled engine, or if cycling between third and fourth
to move it. it is necessary to stop briefly with gears in stop-and-go driving.
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
If you have done all of the above and position if you need to leave your
still cannot move the lever out of vehicle and apply the parking brake.
Driving
Park, see Shift Lock Release on Press on the brake pedal when you
page 181 . are moving the shift lever from
Neutral to another gear.
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid Drive (D) − Use this position for
transmission damage, come to a your normal driving. The
complete stop before shifting into transmission automatically selects a
Park. The shift lever must be in Park suitable gear for the vehicle speed
before you can remove the key from and acceleration. You may notice the
the ignition switch. transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
CONTINUED
179
０４／０５／２７１８：１２：０２３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８３
▼
Second (2) − This position locks First (1) − To shift from Second to Engine Speed Limiter
the transmission in second gear. It First, press the release button on the If you exceed the maximum speed
does not downshift to first gear side of the shift lever. This position for the gear you are in, the engine
when you come to a stop. locks the transmission in first gear. speed will enter into the tachometer’s
By upshifting and downshifting red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
Use Second gear: through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can the engine cut in and out. This is
ProCarManuals.com
operate this transmission much like caused by a limiter in the engine’s

For more power when climbing. a manual transmission without a computer controls. The engine will
clutch pedal. run normally when you reduce the
To increase engine braking when RPM below the red zone.
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery

surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a

trailer.
180
０４／０５／２７１８：１２：１０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８４
▼
Shift Lock Release COVER 4. Insert the key in the Shift Lock
This allows you to move the shift Release slot.
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
ProCarManuals.com
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.
Driving
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to
the shift lever. Use a small flat-
tipped screwdriver or finger nail
file to remove the cover. Carefully
pry off the edge of the cover.
CONTINUED
181
０４／０５／２７１８：１２：１６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８５
▼
If you need to use the Shift Lock

RELEASE Release, it means your vehicle is
BUTTON
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
ProCarManuals.com
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
5. Push down on the key while you

press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to Neutral.
6. Remove the key from the Shift

Lock Release slot, then reinstall
the cover. Make sure the notch on
the cover is on the left side.
Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
182
０４／０５／２７１８：１２：２８３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８６
▼
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof (if the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly or equipped) and the windows are curb. If your vehicle has a manual
your vehicle may roll if it is parked closed. transmission, put it in first gear.
on an incline.
Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
ProCarManuals.com
If your vehicle has an automatic turn the front wheels toward the
transmission, set the parking brake Place any packages, valuables, etc., curb. If your vehicle has a manual
before you put the transmission in in the trunk or take them with you. transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the Lock the doors with the key or the Make sure the parking brake is
parking mechanism in the remote transmitter. fully released before driving away.
Driving
transmission. On EX, LX-V6, and Canadian LX-G Driving with the parking brake
models partially set can overheat or
If your vehicle has a manual Check the indicator on the damage the rear brakes.
transmission, put it in first gear. instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
183
０４／０５／２７１８：１２：３７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８７
▼
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc Check the brakes after driving Braking System Design
brakes. The brakes on the rear through deep water. Apply the The hydraulic system that operates
wheels may be disc or drum, brakes moderately to see if they feel the brakes has two separate circuits.
depending on the model. A power normal. If not, apply them gently and Each circuit works diagonally across
assist helps reduce the effort needed frequently until they do. Be extra the vehicle (the left-front brake is
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps cautious in your driving. connected with the right-rear brake,
ProCarManuals.com
you retain steering control when etc.). If one circuit should develop a
braking very hard. problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting Brake Wear Indicators
your foot on the pedal keeps the The front disc brakes have audible
brakes applied lightly, builds up heat, brake wear indicators. They are also
increases wear and reduces their in the rear disc brakes of the EX,
effectiveness. It also keeps your EX-V6, and LX-V6 models.
brake lights on all the time,
confusing drivers behind you. If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
Constant application of the brakes screeching sound when you apply
when going down a long hill builds the brake pedal. If you do not have
up heat and reduces their effective- the brake pads replaced, they will
ness. Use the engine to assist the screech all the time. It is normal for
brakes by taking your foot off the the brakes to occasionally squeal or
accelerator and downshifting to a squeak when you apply them.
lower gear.
184
０４／０５／２７１８：１２：４７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８８
▼
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes ABS Indicator

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake If the ABS indicator comes on, the
helps prevent the brakes from pedal when the ABS activates, and anti-lock function of the braking
locking up and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is system has shut down. The brakes
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly still work like a conventional system,
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry but without anti-lock. You should
ProCarManuals.com
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on have the dealer inspect your vehicle
the brake pedal very hard before the as soon as possible.
The ABS also balances the front-to- ABS activates. However, you may
rear braking distribution according feel the ABS activate immediately if If the ABS indicator and the brake
to vehicle loading. you are trying to stop on snow or ice. system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
Driving
You should never pump the brake pedal; released, the front-to-rear braking
this defeats the purpose of the ABS. distribution system may also be shut
Let the ABS work for you by always down.
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal as you steer away from
the hazard. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
CONTINUED
185
０４／０５／２７１８：１２：５６３１ＳＤＡ６２００１８９
▼
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
steering control during braking. On LX-V6 and EX-V6 models

ABS INDICATOR The TCS indicator will come on
ABS will not prevent a skid that along with the ABS indicator.
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
ProCarManuals.com
lane change. Always drive at a safe

speed for the road and weather
conditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of

stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
Test your brakes as instructed on or sharp steering wheel movement
page 261 . If the brakes feel normal, can still cause your vehicle to veer
drive slowly and have your vehicle into oncoming traffic or off the road.
repaired by your Honda dealer as
soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard A vehicle with ABS may require a
braking which could cause the rear longer distance to stop on loose or
wheels to lock up and possibly lead uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
to a loss of control. snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
Important Safety Reminders distance between vehicles under
ABS does not reduce the time or those conditions.
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
186
０４／０５／２７１８：１３：０７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１９０
▼
Traction Control System
On LX-V6 and EX-V6 models The TCS indicator (see page 60 )

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR
Your vehicle is equipped with a and the TCS Activation indicator
Traction Control System (TCS) to come on and stay on when there is a
assist you in maintaining traction problem with the TCS.
while driving slowly on loose or
slippery surfaces. You should still install winter tires on
ProCarManuals.com
your vehicle during the winter. Make

TCS monitors the speed of all four sure to use the same size originally
wheels. When it senses a front wheel supplied with the vehicle. Exercise
losing traction, it applies braking to the same caution in winter driving as
that wheel. The TCS Activation you would if your vehicle was not
indicator flashes when this occurs. TCS INDICATOR equipped with TCS.
Driving
Driving with TCS requires no special When starting out or driving on a Driving with the compact spare tire
skills or technique. The TCS does loose or slippery road surface, you installed (see page 246 ) may
not control your vehicle’s whole may notice that the vehicle does not activate the TCS. You should turn off
braking system and cannot prevent respond to the accelerator in the the system.
skidding if you enter a corner too same way it does at other times. This
fast. It is still your responsibility to is a sign TCS is activating. You will
drive at reasonable speeds and to see the TCS Activation indicator
leave a sufficient margin of safety. light flash.
187
０４／０５／２７１８：１３：１７３１ＳＤＡ６２００１９１
▼
TCS ON/OFF Switch Deactivate the system by pressing TCS Activation Indicator
the TCS On/Off switch. The TCS This indicator comes on or flashes
Activation indicator comes on as a under the following conditions:
reminder. Pressing the switch again
turns the system back on. When you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
ProCarManuals.com
The TCS turns on every time you

start the engine, even if you turned it When you manually turn off TCS.
off the last time you drove the
vehicle. It flashes when TCS is regulating
wheelspin.
If the system’s diagnostics senses

a problem with TCS, the indicator
This switch is under the side vent. It will come on and stay on along
lets you turn the TCS on and off. You with the TCS Activation indicator.
cannot turn off the TCS while the
TCS Activation indicator is flashing.
188
０４／０５／２７１８：１３：２３３１ＳＤＡ６２００１９２
▼
If the TCS indicator comes on while This indicator will come on along
driving, pull to the side of the road with the ABS indicator if there is a
when it is safe and turn off the problem in the anti-lock brake
engine. Reset the system by system (see ABS Indicator on page
restarting the engine, and watch the 185 ).
TCS indicator. If the TCS indicator
ProCarManuals.com
remains on, or comes back on while If the TCS indicator comes on along
driving, have the TCS inspected by with the Brake System indicator, it
your dealer. You can still drive the indicates a problem in the brake
vehicle without TCS. system (see Brake System
Indicator on page 58 ).
The TCS indicator may occasionally
Driving
come on for 1 or 2 seconds and then
go out. This is normal.
189
０４／０５／２７１８：１３：３０３１ＳＤＡ６２００１９３
▼
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed to Load Limits

primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
ProCarManuals.com
section.
Exceeding any load limit or

improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed. Total Trailer Weight: The Tongue Load: The weight that
maximum allowable weight of the the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
Check the loading of your trailer and everthing in or on it puts on the hitch should be
vehicle and trailer carefully must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). approximately 10 percent of the
before starting to drive. Towing a load that is too heavy total trailer weight. Too much
can seriously affect your vehicle’s tongue load reduces front-tire
handling and performance. It can traction and steering control. Too
also damage the engine and little tongue load can make the
drivetrain. trailer unstable and cause it to
sway.
190
０４／０５／２７１８：１３：４１３１ＳＤＡ６２００１９４
▼
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load, Gross Axle Weight Rating Checking Loads
start by loading 60 percent of the (GAWR): The best way to confirm that vehicle
load toward the front of the trailer The total weight of the vehicle, all and trailer weights are within limits
and 40 percent toward the rear, then occupants, all cargo, and the is to have them checked at public
re-adjust the load as needed. tongue load must not exceed: scale.
ProCarManuals.com
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 4-cylinder models: Using a suitable scale or a special
(GVWR): (DX, LX) tongue load gauge, check the tongue
The total weight of the vehicle, all 2,195 Ibs (995 kg) load the first time you set up a
occupants, all cargo, and the on the front axle towing combination (a fully-loaded
tongue load must not exceed: 1,960 Ibs (890 kg) vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
on the rear axle tongue load whenever the conditions
Driving
4-cylinder models: (EX, EX-L) change.
(DX, LX) 2,225 Ibs (1,010 kg)
4,080 Ibs (1,850 kg) on the front axle
(EX, EX-L) 1,985 Ibs (900 kg)
4,125 Ibs (1,870 kg) on the rear axle
6-cylinder models: 6-cylinder models:

4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg) 2,360 Ibs (1,070 kg)
on the front axle
2,005 Ibs (910 kg)
on the rear axle
191
０４／０５／２７１８：１３：５１３１ＳＤＡ６２００１９５
▼
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and Hitches Trailer Brakes

Accessories Any hitch used on your vehicle must Honda recommends that any trailer
Towing can require a variety of be properly bolted to the underbody. having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
equipment, depending on the size of (450 kg) or more be equipped with
your trailer, how it will be used, how Safety Chains its own electric or surge-type brakes.
much load you are towing, and Always use safety chains when you
ProCarManuals.com
where you tow. tow a trailer. Make sure the chains If you choose electric brakes, be
are secured to the trailer and hitch, sure they are electrically actuated.
Discuss your needs with your trailer and that they cross under the tongue Do not attempt to tap into your
sales or rental agency, and follow the and can catch the trailer if it vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
guidelines in the rest of this section. becomes unhitched. Leave enough matter how successful it may seem,
Also make sure that all equipment is slack to allow the trailer to turn any attempt to attach trailer brakes
properly installed and that it meets corners easily, but do not let the to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
federal, state, province, and local chains drag on the ground. will lower braking effectiveness and
regulations. create a potential hazard.
See your trailer dealer for more

information on installing electric
brakes.
192
０４／０５／２７１８：１３：５８３１ＳＤＡ６２００１９６
▼
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights Additional Towing Equipment Ask your trailer sales or rental
Trailer lights and equipment must Many states and Canadian provinces agency if any other items are
comply with federal, state, and local require special outside mirrors when recommended or required for your
regulations. Check with your local towing a trailer. Even if they don’t, towing situation.
recreational vehicle dealer for the you should install special mirrors if
requirements in your area, and use you cannot clearly see behind you, or
ProCarManuals.com
only equipment designed for your if the trailer creates a blind spot.
vehicle.
Since lighting and wiring vary by

trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
Driving
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
193
０４／０５／２７１８：１４：１２３１ＳＤＡ６２００１９７
▼
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist Your vehicle tires and spare are Backing Up

When preparing to tow, and before properly inflated (see page 236 ), Always drive slowly and have
driving away, be sure to check the and the trailer tires and spare are someone guide you when backing up.
following: trailer maker. Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
The vehicle has been properly Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting to get the trailer to move to the left,
ProCarManuals.com
serviced, and the tires, brakes, Crosswinds and air turbulence and turn the wheel right to move the
suspension, cooling system, and caused by passing trucks can disrupt trailer to the right.
lights are in good operating your steering and cause trailer
condition. swaying. When being passed by a Parking
large vehicle, keep a constant speed Follow all normal precautions when
All weights and loads are within and steer straight ahead. Do not try parking, including firmly setting the
limits (see pages 190 and 191 ). to make quick steering or braking parking brake and putting the
corrections. transmission in Park (automatic) or
The hitch, safety chains, and any in 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,
other attachments are secure. place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your

vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
194
０４／０５／２７１８：１４：２４３１ＳＤＡ６２００１９８
▼
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking If you must stop when facing uphill,
The added weight, length, and Make turns more slowly and wider use the foot brake or parking brake.
height of a trailer will affect your than normal. The trailer tracks a Do not try to hold the vehicle in
vehicle’s handling and performance, smaller arc than your vehicle, and it place by pressing on the accelerator,
so driving with a trailer requires can hit or run over something the as this can cause the automatic
some special driving skills and vehicle misses. Allow more time and transmission to overheat.
ProCarManuals.com
techniques. distance for braking. Do not brake or

turn suddenly as this could cause the When driving down hills, reduce
For your safety and the safety of trailer to jackknife or turn over. your speed and shift down to 2nd
others, take time to practice driving gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
maneuvers before heading for the Driving on Hills remember it will take longer to slow
open road, and follow the guidelines When climbing hills, closely watch down and stop when towing a trailer.
Driving
below. your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
Towing Speeds and Gears conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
Drive slower than normal in all necessary, pull to the side of the
driving situations, and obey posted road to let the engine cool.
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic If the automatic transmission shifts
transmission, use D position when frequently while going up a hill, shift
towing a trailer on level roads. D3 is to D3.
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the next
column for additional gear
information.)
195
０４／０５／２７１８：１４：３３３１ＳＤＡ６２００２００
▼
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 198 Timing Belt ..................................... 225
important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Schedule .................. 199 Hood Latch ..................................... 225
maintained and how to follow basic Servicing Your Vehicle ............. 200 Lights .............................................. 226
maintenance safety precautions. Owner’s Maintenance Seat Belts ........................................ 233
Checks .................................... 201 Floor Mats ...................................... 233
This section also includes 4-cylinder Models ...................... 202 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 233
ProCarManuals.com
Maintenance Schedules for normal 6-cylinder Models ...................... 204 Wiper Blades .................................. 234
driving and severe driving conditions, Maintenance Record ..................... 206 Tires ................................................ 236
a Maintenance Record, and instruc- Fluid Locations............................... 210 Inflation ....................................... 236
tions for simple maintenance tasks Adding Engine Oil ......................... 212 Tire Inspection ........................... 238
you may want to take care of Recommended Engine Oil........ 212 Tire Maintenance ...................... 238
yourself. Synthetic Oil ............................... 213 Tire Rotation .............................. 239
Engine Oil Additives ................. 213 Replacing Tires .......................... 239
If you have the skills and tools to per- Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 214 Wheels and Tires ....................... 240
Maintenance
form more complex maintenance Windshield Washers ..................... 216 Winter Driving ........................... 240
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Engine Coolant ............................... 217 Snow Tires .............................. 240
to purchase the Service Manual. See Adding Engine Coolant ............. 217 Tire Chains ............................. 241
page 291 for information on how to Transmission Fluid ........................ 219 Checking the Battery .................... 242
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Automatic Vehicle Storage .............................. 243
Transmission.......................... 219
Manual
Transmission.......................... 222
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 223
Brake Fluid ................................. 223
Clutch Fluid ................................ 224
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 224
197
０４／０５／２７１８：１４：４６３１ＳＤＡ６２００２０１
▼
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this

section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this Failure to properly follow
mechanic. vehicle or failing to correct a maintenance instructions and
problem before driving can precautions can cause you to
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
ProCarManuals.com
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed.

the instructions before you begin, Always follow the procedures
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection, and precautions in this owner’s
and skills required. maintenance recommendations, manual.
Make sure your vehicle is parked and schedules in this owner’s
on level ground, the parking brake manual.
is set, and the engine is off. Some of the most important safety
To clean parts, use a commercially precautions are given here. However,
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards we cannot warn you of every
cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison conceivable hazard that can arise in
To reduce the possibility of fire or from engine exhaust. Be sure performing maintenance. Only you
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, there is adequate ventilation can decide whether or not you
and flames away from the battery whenever you operate the should perform a given task.
and all fuel-related parts. engine.
Wear eye protection and Burns from hot parts. Let the
protective clothing when engine and exhaust system cool
working near the battery or before touching any parts.
when using compressed air. Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
198
０４／０５／２７１８：１４：５９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２０２
▼
Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance schedule assumes Which Schedule to Follow Trailer towing, driving with a roof
you will use your vehicle as normal Service your vehicle according to the top carrier, or driving in
transportation for passengers and time and mileage periods on one of mountainous conditions.
their possessions. You should also the Maintenance Schedules on the
follow these recommendations: following pages. Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-
iced roads.
ProCarManuals.com
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s U.S. Owners − Follow the

load limit. This puts excess stress Maintenance Schedule for Severe NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY
on the engine, brakes, and many Conditions if you drive your vehicle drive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, you
other vehicle parts. The load limit MAINLY under one or more of the should follow the Normal Conditions
is shown on the tire information following conditions. Maintenance Schedule.
label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km) Canadian Owners − Follow the
Operate your vehicle on per trip or, in freezing Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Maintenance
reasonable roads within the legal temperatures, driving less than 10 Conditions.
speed limit. miles (16 km) per trip.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a Driving in extremely hot [over

distance of several miles 90°F (32°C)] conditions.
(kilometers).
Used primarily as a delivery
Always use unleaded gasoline with vehicle or taxi that is driven
the proper octane rating (see page mostly in stop-and-go traffic and/
160 ). or parked with the engine idling.
199
０４／０６／０１１４：１５：４２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２０３
▼
Servicing Your Vehicle We recommend the use of Honda According to state and federal
Your authorized dealer knows your parts and fluids whenever you have regulations, failure to perform
vehicle best and can provide maintenance done. maintenance on the items marked
competent, efficient service. with ＃ will not void your emissions
However, service at a dealer is not U.S. Vehicles: warranties. However, all
mandatory to keep your warranties Maintenance, replacement, or maintenance services should be
ProCarManuals.com
in effect. Maintenance may be done repair of emissions control performed at the recommended time
by any qualified service facility or devices and systems may be or mileage period to ensure long-
skilled person to keep your done by any automotive repair term reliability.
warranties in effect. Keep all the establishment or individual using
receipts as proof of completion, and parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to
have the person who does the work EPA standards.
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
200
０４／０５／２７１８：１５：１４３１ＳＤＡ６２００２０４
▼
Owner’s Maintenance Checks Brakes − Check the fluid level

You should check the following monthly. See page 223 .
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform Tires − Check the tire pressure
any check, turn to the appropriate monthly. Examine the tread for
page listed. wear and foreign objects. See page
ProCarManuals.com
236 .
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See Lights − Check the operation of
page 165 . the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
Engine coolant level − Check the and license plate lights monthly.
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 166 .
Maintenance
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See pages
219 − 222 .
201
０４／０５／２７１８：１５：３７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２０５
▼
4-cylinder Models
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
miles x 1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
km x 1,000 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
Check engine oil and coolant Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check tires Check inflation and condition once a month
Replace engine oil Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 239 ) Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Replace engine oil filter

Check front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
ProCarManuals.com
Inspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system＃
Fuel lines and connections＃
Inspect drive belt Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Replace automatic transmission fluid＊
Replace manual transmission fluid Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or every 6 years, whichever comes first
Inspect idle speed Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)
Replace engine coolant 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 200 .
＊: Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
202
０４／０５／２７１８：１６：０１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２０６
▼
4-cylinder Models
miles x 1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
km x 1,000 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
Replace engine oil Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions

Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
ProCarManuals.com
Inspect the following items: Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Exhaust system＃
Lights and controls/vehicle underbody
Replace dust and pollen filter＊1
Replace air cleaner element Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)
Replace spark plugs
Replace automatic transmission fluid＊2
Replace manual transmission fluid Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or every 3 years, whichever comes first
Inspect idle speed Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)
＊1: See dust and pollen filter on page 235 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
＊2: Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
203
０４／０５／２７１８：１６：２０３１ＳＤＡ６２００２０７
▼
6-cylinder Models
miles x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150
km x 1,000 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240
Replace engine oil Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions

ProCarManuals.com

Suspension components Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Driveshaft boots
Exhaust system＃
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Replace automatic transmission fluid＊
Inspect idle speed Inspect every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first
＊: Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
204
０４／０５／２７１８：１６：４２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２０８
▼
6-cylinder Models
miles x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150
km x 1,000 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240
Replace engine oil and oil filter Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
ProCarManuals.com
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Exhaust system＃
Lights and controls/vehicle underbody
Replace dust and pollen filter＊1
Replace air cleaner element Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)
Replace spark plugs
Replace automatic transmission fluid＊2
Inspect idle speed Inspect every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)
Replace timing belt＃＊3, and inspect water pump Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first
＊1: See dust and pollen filter on page 233 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
＊2: Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
＊3: See timing belt on page 225 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
205
０４／０５／２７１８：１６：５０３１ＳＤＡ６２００２０９
▼
Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (pages 202 , 204 ) or
severe conditions (pages 203 , 205 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
3,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km 22,250 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
6,000 km 36,000 km
Date Date
5,000 mi mi/km 25,000 mi mi/km

ProCarManuals.com
8,000 km 40,000 km
Date Date
7,500 mi mi/km 26,250 mi mi/km

12,000 km 42,000 km
Date Date
10,000 mi mi/km 30,000 mi mi/km

16,000 km 48,000 km
Date Date
11,250 mi mi/km 33,750 mi mi/km

18,000 km 54,000 km
Date Date
15,000 mi mi/km 35,000 mi mi/km

24,000 km 56,000 km
Date Date
18,750 mi mi/km 37,500 mi mi/km

30,000 km 60,000 km
Date Date
20,000 mi mi/km 40,000 mi mi/km

32,000 km 64,000 km
Date Date
206
０４／０５／２７１８：１６：５７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１０
▼
66,000 km 102,000 km
Date Date
45,000 mi mi/km 65,000 mi mi/km

72,000 km 104,000 km
Date Date
ProCarManuals.com
48,750 mi mi/km 67,500 mi mi/km

78,000 km 108,000 km
Date Date
50,000 mi mi/km 70,000 mi mi/km

80,000 km 112,000 km
Date Date
52,500 mi mi/km 71,250 mi mi/km

84,000 km 114,000 km
Maintenance
Date Date
55,000 mi mi/km 75,000 mi mi/km

88,000 km 120,000 km
Date Date
56,250 mi mi/km 78,750 mi mi/km

90,000 km 126,000 km
Date Date
60,000 mi mi/km 80,000 mi mi/km

96,000 km 128,000 km
Date Date
CONTINUED
207
０４／０５／２７１８：１７：０３３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１１
▼
132,000 km 162,000 km
Date Date
85,000 mi mi/km 105,000 mi mi/km

136,000 km 168,000 km
Date Date
ProCarManuals.com
86,250 mi mi/km 108,750 mi mi/km

138,000 km 174,000 km
Date Date
90,000 mi mi/km 110,000 mi mi/km

144,000 km 176,000 km
Date Date
93,750 mi mi/km 112,500 mi mi/km

150,000 km 180,000 km
Date Date
95,000 mi mi/km 115,000 mi mi/km

152,000 km 184,000 km
Date Date
97,500 mi mi/km 116,250 mi mi/km

156,000 km 186,000 km
Date Date
100,000 mi mi/km 120,000 mi mi/km

166,000 km 192,000 km
Date Date
208
０４／０５／２７１８：１７：１１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１２
▼
198,000 km 228,000 km
Date Date
125,000 mi mi/km 145,000 mi mi/km

200,000 km 232,000 km
Date Date
ProCarManuals.com
127,500 mi mi/km 146,250 mi mi/km

204,000 km 234,000 km
Date Date
130,000 mi mi/km 150,000 mi mi/km

208,000 km 240,000 km
Date Date
131,250 mi mi/km
210,000 km
Maintenance
Date
135,000 mi mi/km
216,000 km
Date
138,750 mi mi/km
222,000 km
Date
140,000 mi mi/km
224,000 km
Date
209
０４／０５／２７１８：１７：１６３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１３
▼
Fluid Locations
4-cylinder Models
BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH FLUID

(Gray cap) (5-speed Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
ProCarManuals.com
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK ENGINE OIL

(Orange handle) FILL CAP
WASHER FLUID AUTOMATIC

(Blue cap) TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING COOLANT

FLUID (Red cap) RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
210
０４／０５／２７１８：１７：２１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１４
▼
Fluid Locations
6-cylinder Models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID
(Orange loop) (Gray cap)
ProCarManuals.com
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
Maintenance
(Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap) RADIATOR CAP
211
０４／０５／２７１８：１７：２８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１５
▼
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
ProCarManuals.com
the oil is energy conserving, and that

it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Unscrew and remove the engine oil Install the engine oil fill cap and
fill cap on top of the valve cover. tighten it securely. Wait a few
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so minutes and recheck the oil level. Do
you do not spill. Clean up any spills not fill above the upper mark; you
immediately. Spilled oil could could damage the engine.
damage components in the engine
compartment.
212
０４／０５／２７１８：１７：３７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１６
▼
Adding Engine Oil
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred The oil viscosity or weight is Synthetic Oil
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is provided on the container’s label. You may use a synthetic motor oil if
highly recommended that you use 5W-20 oil is formulated for year- it meets the same requirements
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for round protection of your Honda to given for a conventional motor oil, it
optimum engine protection. Make improve cold weather starting and displays the API Certification Seal
sure the API Certification Seal says fuel economy. and it is the proper weight. You must
ProCarManuals.com
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ follow the oil and filter change

intervals given in the maintenance
schedule.
Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
Maintenance
performance and durability.
Ambient Temperature
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
213
０４／０５／２７１８：１７：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１７
▼
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter WASHER OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLT WASHER
according to the recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. The oil
and filter collect contaminants that
can damage your engine if they are
not removed regularly.
ProCarManuals.com
Changing the oil and filter requires

special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service. 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have 2. Open the hood and remove the 3. Remove the oil filter and let the
this maintenance done by a skilled engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil remaining oil drain. A special
mechanic. drain bolt and washer from the wrench (available from your
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil dealer) is required.
1. Run the engine until it reaches into an appropriate container.
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
214
０４／０５／２７１８：１８：００３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１８
▼
Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER OIL FILTER 7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine and check your work.
ProCarManuals.com
8. Let the engine run for several

minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
4. Install a new oil filter according to 6. Refill the engine with the recom- add more oil.
Maintenance
the instructions that come with it. mended oil.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting Engine oil change capacity
surface of a new oil filter. (including filter): Improper disposal of engine oil can be
(4-cylinder models) harmf ul to the environment. If you
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) change your own oil, please dispose of
then reinstall the drain bolt. (6-cylinder models) the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
Tighten it to: 4.5 US qt (4.3 ) container and take it to a recycling
(4-cylinder models) center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m) or dump it on the ground.
(6-cylinder models)
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
215
０４／０５／２７１８：１８：０９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２１９
▼
Windshield Washers
Check the level in the windshield LEVEL GAUGE LEVEL GAUGE

washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal use.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by

removing the cap and looking at the
ProCarManuals.com
level gauge attached to the cap.
Canadian Models: The low washer

level indicator will light when the
level is low (see page 63 ).
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This NOTICE: Do not use engine antif reeze
increases the cleaning capability and or a vinegar/water solution in the
prevents freezing in cold weather. windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
When you refill the reservoir, clean a vinegar/water solution can damage
the edges of the windshield wiper the windshield washer pump. Use only
blades with windshield washer fluid commercially-available windshield
on a clean cloth. This will help to washer f luid.
condition the blade edges.
216
０４／０５／２７１８：１８：１９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２０
▼
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not

available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
ProCarManuals.com
Continued use of any non-Honda

coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK 6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve empty, you should also check the
tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant level in the radiator.
coolant to bring it up to MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda All Season Removing the radiator cap
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This while the engine is hot can
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent cause the coolant to spray out,
antifreeze and 50 percent water. seriously scalding you.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water. Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
217
０４／０５／２７１８：１８：２９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２１
▼
Engine Coolant
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.

Fill it to halfway between the MAX
RADIATOR CAP and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or

ProCarManuals.com
other additives to your vehicle’s

cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 4. The coolant level should be up to
are cool. the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap Pour the coolant slowly and
counterclockwise, without carefully so you do not spill. Clean
pressing down. up any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
3. Remove the radiator cap by compartment.
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise. 5. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten it.
218
０４／０５／２７１８：１８：４２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２２
▼
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission marks.

4-cylinder models
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid into the tube to bring it to the
upper mark.
ProCarManuals.com
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully

so you do not spill. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
UPPER MARK
compartment.
LOWER MARK
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
Maintenance
DIPSTICK
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
Check the fluid level with the engine 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into it’s not available, you may use a
at normal operating temperature. the transmission. DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Make sure the rubber cap on the replacement. However, continued
Shut off the engine. dipstick fits in the dipstick guide use can affect the shift quality. Have
and that you push the dipstick in the transmission flushed and refilled
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) all the way. with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
from the transmission, and wipe it convenient.
with a clean cloth. 4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower CONTINUED
219
０４／０５／２７１８：１８：５１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２３
▼
Transmission Fluid
To thoroughly flush the transmission, 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Automatic Transmission
the technician should drain and refill into the transmission securely as 6-cylinder models
it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic shown in the illustration.
Transmission Fluid), then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this The transmission should be drained
three times. Then drain and refill the and refilled with new fluid according
ProCarManuals.com
transmission a final time. to the time and distance recommen-

dations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,

contact your dealer.
DIPSTICK
Check the fluid level with the engine

at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.

Shut off the engine.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)

from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
220
０４／０５／２７１８：１９：００３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２４
▼
Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower To thoroughly flush the transmission,

mark, remove the fill plug and add the technician should drain and refill
fluid into the tube to bring it to the it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
upper mark. Transmission Fluid), then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully three times. Then drain and refill the
ProCarManuals.com
so you do not spill. Clean up any transmission a final time.

spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1

UPPER MARK
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
LOWER MARK it’s not available, you may use a
Maintenance
DEXRON III automatic
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into transmission fluid as a temporary
the transmission. replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. Have
Make sure the rubber cap fits in the transmission flushed and refilled
the dipstick guide and the dipstick with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
is down all the way. convenient.
4. Remove the dipstick and check

the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks. CONTINUED
221
０４／０５／２７１８：１９：０８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２５
▼
Transmission Fluid
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Manual Transmission If Honda MTF is not available, you
into the transmission. may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
FILLER BOLT viscosity motor oil with the API
The transmission should be drained Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
and refilled with new fluid according GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
to the time and distance recommen- temporary replacement. However,
ProCarManuals.com
dations in the maintenance schedule. motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
If you are not sure how to add fluid, cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
contact your dealer. soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained

Correct level and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
Check the fluid level with the dations in the maintenance schedule.
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt, and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall
the filler bolt, and tighten it securely.
222
０４／０５／２７１８：１９：１７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２６
▼
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the fluid level in the Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
reservoirs monthly. There are up to Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
two reservoirs, depending on the available, you should use only DOT 3 MAX
model. They are: or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
Brake fluid reservoir (all models) replacement.
ProCarManuals.com
Clutch fluid reservoir

(manual transmission only) Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
Replace the brake fluid according to of the system. Have the brake
the recommendations in the system flushed and refilled with
maintenance schedule. Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible. MIN
Maintenance
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not The fluid level should be between
compatible with your vehicle’s the MIN and MAX marks on the side
braking system and can cause of the reservoir. If the level is at or
extensive damage. below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
223
０４／０５／２７１８：１９：２８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２７
▼
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Clutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid

MAX UPPER LEVEL UPPER LEVEL
ProCarManuals.com
MIN 4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL 6-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL
The fluid level should be between Check the level on the side of the Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
the MIN and MAX marks on the side reservoir when the engine is cold. so you do not spill. Clean up any
of the reservoir. If it is not, add The fluid should be between the spill immediately; it could damage
brake fluid to bring it up to that level. UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. components in the engine
Use the same fluid specified for the If not, add power steering fluid to the compartment.
brake system. UPPER LEVEL.
Low fluid level can indicate a leak in

the clutch system. Have this system
inspected as soon as possible.
224
０４／０５／２７１８：１９：３９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２８
▼
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Always use Honda Power Steering Timing Belt

Fluid. You may use another power 6-cylinder models only
steering fluid as an emergency The timing belt should be replaced
replacement, but have the power at the intervals shown in the
steering system flushed and refilled maintenance schedule. Replace the
with Honda PSF as soon as possible. belt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) if
ProCarManuals.com
you regularly drive your vehicle in

A low power steering fluid level can one or more of these conditions:
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have In very high temperatures
the system inspected as soon as (over 110°F, 43°C).
possible. In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
Frequently tow a trailer.
Maintenance
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
225
０４／０５／２７１８：１９：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２２９
▼
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs get
The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has two bulbs on each very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
when your vehicle was new. If you side, four in total. Make sure you are scratch on the glass can cause the bulb
regularly carry heavy items in the replacing the bulb that is burned out. to overheat and shatter.
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment Your vehicle uses halogen headlight
may be required. Adjustments bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
ProCarManuals.com
should be performed by your dealer it by its plastic case and protect the
or other qualified mechanic. glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
226
０４／０５／２７１８：１９：５６３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３０
▼
Lights
High Beam Headlight
FASTENERS AIR INTAKE BULB

AIR INTAKE
COVER COVER
FASTENERS
ProCarManuals.com
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models TAB
Maintenance
1. Open the hood. To change a bulb 2. Remove the electrical connector 3. Remove the bulb by turning it
on the passenger’s side, undo the from the bulb by squeezing the approximately one-quarter turn
two fasteners and remove the air connector to unlock the tab, then counterclockwise.
intake cover. slide the connector off the bulb.
4. Install the new bulb and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
CONTINUED
227
０４／０５／２７１８：２０：０９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３１
▼
Lights
Low Beam Headlight
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
ProCarManuals.com
TAB
6-cylinder models BULB
5. Push the electrical connector onto 1. To change the passenger’s side 3. Pull the inner fender cover away
the bulb. bulb, start the engine, turn the from the fender and bumper.
steering wheel all the way to the
6. Turn on the headlights to test the left, and turn off the engine. To 4. Remove the bulb by turning it
new bulb. change the driver’s side bulb, turn approximately one-quarter turn
the steering wheel to the right. counterclockwise.
7. (Passenger’s side)
Reinstall the air intake cover. 2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to 5. Remove the electrical connector
Reinstall the two fasteners and remove the two holding clips from from the bulb by squeezing the
secure them by pushing on the the inner fender. connector to unlock the tab, then
heads until they lock. slide the connector off the bulb.
228
０４／０５／２７１８：２０：２１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３２
▼
Lights
6. Install the new bulb and turn it Replacing the Front Side Marker/
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock Turn Signal and Parking Light
it in place. Bulb
7. Push the electrical connector onto HOLDING CLIPS

the bulb.
ProCarManuals.com
8. Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
9. Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the two holding clips. Lock
each one in place by pushing on
the center.
Maintenance
BULB
1. To change the passenger’s side 3. Pull the inner fender cover away
bulb, start the engine, turn the from the fender and bumper.
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To 4. Remove the socket from the
change the driver’s side bulb, turn headlight assembly by turning it
the steering wheel to the right. one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to

remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender. CONTINUED
229
０４／０５／２７１８：２０：３２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３３
▼
Lights
5. To remove the burned out bulb, Replacing Rear Bulbs 4. Push a new bulb straight into the
push it in and turn it (in Fenders) socket until it bottoms, and
counterclockwise until it unlocks. reinstall the socket into the light
BULBS assembly by turning it clockwise
6. Install the new bulb and turn it until it locks.
clockwise to lock it in place.
ProCarManuals.com
5. Test the new bulb to make sure it

7. Insert the socket into the works.
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place. 6. Reinstall the light assembly cover.
8. Test the new bulb to make sure it

works. SOCKETS
COVER
9. Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip 1. Open the trunk.
by pushing on the center.
2. Remove the light assembly cover
by pulling its outside edge.
3. Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
and pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
230
０４／０５／２７１８：２０：４７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３４
▼
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs

(in Trunk Lid)
SOCKETS
ProCarManuals.com
BULBS
TRIM CLIP SOCKETS BULBS
Maintenance
1. Open the trunk. 3. Carefully bend back the corner of 5. Install a new bulb into the socket,
the trunk lid trim to expose the and reinstall the socket into the
2. 6-cylinder models bulbs. light assembly.
Remove the trim clips from the
right or left corner of the trunk lid 4. Remove the socket by turning it 6. Test the lights.
trim by carefully prying them one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
using a small, flat-tip screwdriver and pull the bulb straight out of its 7. Push the trunk lid trim back into
wrapped with tape. socket. position.
8. Press the trim clips back into their

holes. CONTINUED
231
０４／０５／２７１８：２０：５５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３５
▼
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake

Light Bulb
ProCarManuals.com
BULB
SOCKET
1. Open the trunk and remove the

socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
2. Remove the burned-out bulb by

pulling it straight out of the socket.
3. Install the new bulb and reinstall

the socket.
232
０４／０５／２７１８：２１：０５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３６
▼
Seat Belts, Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
Seat Belts Floor Mats If you use an aftermarket floor mat,

make sure it fits properly and that it
LOOP
can be used with the floor mat
anchor. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mat.
ProCarManuals.com
Dust and Pollen Filter

This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
Have your Honda dealer replace this
Maintenance
Clean dirty seat belts with a soft The driver’s and right rear floor filter every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
brush and a mixture of mild soap and mats that came with your vehicle under normal conditions. It should
warm water. Do not use bleach, dye, hook over the floor mat anchors. be replaced every 15,000 miles
or cleaning solvents that can weaken This keeps the floor mats from (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in
the belt material. Let the belts air sliding forward and possibly urban areas that have high
dry before you use the vehicle. interfering with the pedals or concentrations of soot in the air, or if
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat marking the front passenger’s the flow from the climate control
belt anchors can cause the belts to weight sensors ineffective. system becomes less than usual.
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth If you remove the floor mats, make
dampened in mild soap and warm sure to re-anchor them when you put
water or isopropyl alcohol. them back in your vehicle.
233
０４／０５／２７１８：２１：１３３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３７
▼
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
ProCarManuals.com
and unwiped areas when used.
LOCK TAB
To replace a wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm by pushing in
1. Raise the wiper arm off the the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
windshield. Raise the driver’s side while you push the blade assembly
first, then the passenger’s side. toward the base of the arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper

arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
234
０４／０５／２７１８：２１：２１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３８
▼
Wiper Blades
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the

BLADE BLADE holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
ProCarManuals.com
7. Lower the wiper arm down against

the windshield. Lower the
passenger’s side first, then the
driver’s side.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
Maintenance
by grasping the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
235
０４／０５／２７１８：２１：３０３１ＳＤＡ６２００２３９
▼
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Use a gauge to measure the air
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated pressure in each tire at least once a
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of month. Even tires that are in good
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding condition may lose one to two psi (10
comfort. to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
The following pages give more month. Remember to check the
ProCarManuals.com
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly, spare tire at the same time.
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to Check the air pressures when the
fail from being overheated. tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least
Overinflated tires can make your three hours, or driven less than 1
Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride more harshly, are mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, if
worn or improperly inflated can more prone to damage from road needed, to match the recommended
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly. cold tire pressures on the next page.
be seriously hurt or killed.
We recommend that you visually
Follow all instructions in this check your tires every day. If you
owner’s manual regarding tire think a tire might be low, check it
inflation and maintenance. immediately with a tire gauge.
236
０４／０５／２７１８：２１：４５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２４０
▼
Tires
If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures LX model
tires are hot (driven for several The following chart shows the Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
miles), you will see readings 4 to 6 recommended cold tire pressures for for Normal Driving
psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) most normal driving conditions. P205/65R15 92H Front:
higher than the cold readings. This 30 psi (210 kPa ,
is normal. Do not let air out to match All models except LX 2.1 kgf/cm )
ProCarManuals.com
the recommended cold air pressure. Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure Rear:
The tire will be underinflated. for Normal Driving 29 psi (200 kPa ,
P195/65R15 89H ＊1 Front: 2.0 kgf/cm )
You should get your own tire P205/60R16 91V ＊2 32 psi (220 kPa ,
pressure gauge whenever you check 2.2 kgf/cm ) The compact spare tire pressure is:
your tire pressures. This will make it Rear: 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
easier for you to tell if a pressure 30 psi (210 kPa ,
loss is due to a tire problem and not 2.1 kgf/cm ) For convenience, the recommended
Maintenance
due to a variation between gauges. ＊1 DX model tire sizes and cold air pressures are
＊2 EX and V6 models on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are For additional information about
punctured, you should look closely your tires, see page 276 .
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
237
▼
▲
Tires
Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Maintenance

Every time you check inflation, you In addition to proper inflation,
should also examine the tires for correct wheel alignment helps to
damage, foreign objects, and wear. decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
ProCarManuals.com
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
You should look for check the wheel alignment.
Bumps or bulges in the tread or Have your dealer check the tires if
side of the tire. Replace the tire if you feel a consistent vibration while
you find either of these conditions. driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side TREAD WEAR INDICATORS wheel. When you have new tires
of the tire. Replace the tire if you installed, make sure they are
can see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators balanced. This increases riding
molded into the tread. When the comfort and tire life. For best results,
Excessive tread wear. tread wears down, you will see a have the installer perform a dynamic
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across balance.
the tread. This shows there is less
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left U.S. LX, EX and EX-V6 models
on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little Improper wheel weights can damage
traction on wet roads. You should your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use
replace the tire if you can see three only genuine Honda wheels weights f o r
or more tread wear indicators. balancing.
０４／０６／０１１４：１６：１２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２４２
▼
Tires
Tire Rotation Move the tires to the positions Replacing Tires and Wheels
shown in the illustration each time Replace your tires with radial tires of
Front Front
they are rotated. If you purchase the same size, load range, speed
directional tires, rotate only front-to- rating, and maximum cold tire
back. pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
ProCarManuals.com
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on

your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) ABS to work inconsistently.
Maintenance
To help increase tire life and It is best to replace all four tires at
distribute wear more evenly, rotate the same time. If that is not possible
the tires at these intervals: or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
4-cylinder Every 10,000 miles Replacing just one tire can seriously
models (16,000 km) affect your vehicle’s handling.
6-cylinder Every 7,500 miles
models (12,000 km)
239
０４／０５／２７１８：２２：３１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２４３
▼
Tires
If you ever replace a wheel, make Wheels and Tires Winter Driving
sure that the wheel’s specifications Wheel: Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All
match those of the original wheels. DX and LX models Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
Replacement wheels are available at 15 x 6 1/2 JJ weather tread design suitable for
your dealer. most winter driving conditions.
All EX models
ProCarManuals.com
16 x 6 1/2 JJ For the best performance in snowy

or icy conditions, you should install
Installing improper tires on your LX-V6 model snow tires or tire chains. They may
vehicle can affect handling and 16 x 6 1/2 JJ be required by local laws under
stability. This can cause a crash certain conditions.
in which you can be seriously Tire:
hurt or killed. DX model Snow Tires
P195/65R15 89H If you mount snow tires on your
Always use the size and type of vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires recommended in this LX model tires of the same size and load range
owner’s manual. P205/65R15 92H as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
All EX and V6 models provided by snow tires on dry roads
P205/60R16 91V may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
See page 277 for DOT tire quality maximum speed recommendations.
grading information, and page
279 for tire size information.
240
０４／０５／２７１８：２２：３８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２４４
▼
Tires
Tire Chains When installing cables, follow the

Mount snow chains on your tires manufacturer’s instructions, and
when required by driving conditions mount them as tight as you can. Using the wrong chains, or not
or local laws. Install them only on the Make sure they are not contacting properly installing chains, can
front tires. the brake lines or suspension. Drive damage the brake lines and
slowly with them installed. If you cause a crash in which you can
ProCarManuals.com
Because your vehicle has limited tire hear them coming into contact with be seriously injured or killed.
clearance, Honda strongly the body or chassis, stop and
recommends using the chains listed investigate. Remove them as soon as Follow all instructions in this
below, made by Security Chain you begin driving on cleared roads. owner’s manual regarding the
Company (SCC). selection and use of tire chains.
DX
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1130
Maintenance
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
LX
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134
EX and V6
241
０４／０５／２７１８：２２：４６３１ＳＤＡ６２００２４５
▼
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW If additional battery maintenance is

needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,

terminals, and related accessories
ProCarManuals.com
contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to

a charger, disconnect both cables to
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
Check the condition of the battery Check the terminals for corrosion (a the negative (−) cable first, and
monthly by looking at the test white or yellowish powder). To reconnect it last.
indicator window. The label on the remove it, cover the terminals with a
battery explains the test indicator’s solution of baking soda and water. It
colors. will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
242
０４／０５／２７１８：２２：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２００２４６
▼
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
Vehicle Storage Fill the fuel tank.

If you need to park your vehicle for
The battery gives off explosive an extended period (more than one Change the engine oil and filter.
hydrogen gas during normal month), there are several things you
operation. should do to prepare it for storage. Wash and dry the exterior
Proper preparation helps prevent completely.
ProCarManuals.com
A spark or flame can cause the deterioration and makes it easier to

battery to explode with enough get your vehicle back on the road. If Clean the interior. Make sure the
force to kill or seriously hurt you. possible, store your vehicle indoors. carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Maintenance
243
０４／０５／２７１８：２３：０５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２４７
▼
Vehicle Storage
Leave the parking brake off. Put Support the front wiper blade If you store your vehicle for 1 year or
the transmission in Reverse arms with a folded towel or rag so longer, have your dealer perform the
(5-speed manual) or Park they do not touch the windshield. maintenance inspections as soon as
(automatic). you take it out of storage (see
To minimize sticking, apply a pages 202 and 204 ). The 6-cylinder
Block the rear wheels. silicone spray lubricant to all door model needs the inspections called
ProCarManuals.com
and trunk seals. Also, apply a for in the 2 years/30,000 miles

If the vehicle is to be stored for a vehicle body wax to the painted (48,000 km) maintenance schedule
longer period, it should be surfaces that mate with the door (Normal Conditions) and the 4-
supported on jackstands so the and trunk seals. cylinder model needs the inspections
tires are off the ground. called for in the 2 years/40,000 miles
Cover the vehicle with a (64,000 km) maintenance schedule
Leave one window open slightly (if ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made (Normal Conditions). The
the vehicle is being stored from a porous material such as replacements called for in the
indoors). cotton. Non-porous materials, such maintenanceschedule are not
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, needed unless the vehicle has actually
Disconnect the battery. which can damage the paint. reached that time or mileage.
If possible, periodically run the

engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fan cycles twice).
Preferably, do this once a month.
244
０４／０５／２７１８：２３：０９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２４８
▼
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 246

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 247
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start ............ 251
gives you information about how to Nothing Happens or the
safely evaluate the problem and what Starter Motor Operates
to do to correct it. If the problem has Very Slowly............................. 251
ProCarManuals.com
stranded you on the side of the road, The Starter Operates

you may be able to get going again. Normally ................................. 252
If not, you will also find instructions Jump Starting ................................. 253
on getting your vehicle towed. If the Engine Overheats ............... 256
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 258
Charging System Indicator........... 259
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 259
Readiness Codes ........................ 260
Brake System Indicator ................ 261
Closing the Moonroof ................... 262

Emergency Towing ....................... 263
Fuses ............................................... 265
Checking and Replacing ........... 265
245
０４／０５／２７１８：２３：２２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２４９
▼
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount snow chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare tire.
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use the compact spare tire
soon as you can. if you are towing a trailer.
ProCarManuals.com
Check the inflation pressure of the Do not use your compact spare
compact spare tire every time you tire on another vehicle unless it is
check the other tires. It should be the same make and model.
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) On LX-V6 and EX-V6 models
Turn off the TCS (see page 188 ). TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions: Driving with the compact spare
tire may activate the TCS. Replace the tire when you can see
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). the tread wear indicator bars. The
On models with manual replacement should be the same size
This tire gives a harsher ride and transmission, do not drive for a and design tire, mounted on the
less traction on some road sur- long period with the compact same wheel. The spare tire is not
faces. Use greater caution while spare tire mounted on a front designed to be mounted on a regular
driving. wheel; it will damage the limited wheel, and the spare wheel is not
slip differential. designed for mounting a regular tire.
246
０４／０５／２７１８：２３：３１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５０
▼
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, TRUNK FLOOR 3. The tools are in the trunk. Open
stop in a safe place to change it. the trunk and raise the trunk floor
Drive slowly along the shoulder until by lifting up on the back edge.
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes. 4. Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
ProCarManuals.com
5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take

the spare tire out of its well.
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
TOOL KIT SPARE TIRE JACK
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level and
never get under the vehicle non-slippery ground. Put the
when it is supported only by the transmission in Park (automatic)

jack. or Reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,

and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
247
０４／０５／２７１８：２３：３９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５１
▼

ProCarManuals.com
JACK JACKING POINT
6. The jack is behind a cover in the 7. Turn the jack’s end bracket 9. Place the jack under the jacking
right fender. Remove the cover by counterclockwise to loosen it, then point nearest the tire you need to
turning the handle counterclock- remove the jack. change. Turn the end bracket
wise, then pulling on the cover. clockwise until the top of the jack
8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn contacts the jacking point. Make
with the wheel wrench. sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
248
０４／０５／２７１８：２３：４７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５２
▼
EXTENSION 11.Remove the wheel nuts and flat

tire. Place the flat tire on the
ground with the outside surface of
the wheel facing up.
ProCarManuals.com
WHEEL WRENCH BRAKE HUB
10.Use the extension and the wheel 12.Before mounting the spare tire,
nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with

ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
U.S. DX, LX and DX, LX-G model in driving.
Canada:
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver
or other tool. The wheel cover
cannot be removed without first
removing the wheel nuts.
CONTINUED
249
０４／０５／２７１８：２３：５８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５３
▼
WING BOLT 16.Remove the center cap before

storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
17.Place the flat tire face down in the

spare tire well.
ProCarManuals.com
For For
spare normal 18.Remove the spacer cone from the
tire tire
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
SPACER CONE 19.Secure the flat tire by screwing

the wing bolt back into its hole.
13.Put on the spare tire. Put the 15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
wheel nuts back on finger-tight, the same crisscross pattern. Have 20.Store the jack in its holder. Turn
then tighten them in a crisscross the wheel nut torque checked at the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
pattern with the wheel nut wrench the nearest automotive service place. Replace the cover. Store the
until the wheel is firmly against facility. tools.
the hub. Do not try to tighten Tighten the wheel nuts to:
them fully. 80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
14.Lower the vehicle to the ground

and remove the jack.
250
０４／０５／２７１８：２４：０９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５４
▼
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter

Diagnosing why the engine won’t Motor Operates Very Slowly
Loose items can fly around the start falls into two areas, depending When you turn the ignition switch to
interior in a crash and could on what you hear when you turn the START (III), you do not hear the
seriously injure the occupants. key to START (III): normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
ProCarManuals.com
Store the wheel, jack, and tools You hear nothing, or almost or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
securely before driving. nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or Check these things:
operates very slowly. Check the transmission interlock.
21.Store the wheel cover or center If you have a manual transmission,
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does You can hear the starter motor the clutch pedal must be pushed
not get scratched or damaged. operating normally, or the starter all the way to the floor or the
motor sounds like it is spinning starter will not operate. With an
faster than normal, but the engine automatic transmission, it must be
does not start up and run. in Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights, and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or do not come on at
all, the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 253 .
CONTINUED
251
０４／０５／２７１８：２４：２０３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５５
▼
If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to START The Starter Operates Normally Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
(III). If the headlights do not dim, In this case, the starter motor’s gauge; the low fuel indicator may
check the condition of the fuses. If speed sounds normal, or even faster not be working.
the fuses are OK, there is than normal, when you turn the
probably something wrong with ignition switch to START (III), but There may be an electrical
the electrical circuit for the the engine does not run. problem, such as no power to the
ProCarManuals.com
ignition switch or starter motor. fuel pump. Check all the fuses
You will need a qualified Are you using the proper starting (see page 265 ).
technician to determine the procedure? Refer to Starting the
problem (see Emergency Towing Engine on page 175 . If you find nothing wrong, you will
on page 263 ). need a qualified technician to find
Are you using a properly coded the problem. See Emergency
If the headlights dim noticeably or key? An improperly coded key will Towing on page 263 .
go out when you try to start the cause the immobilizer system
engine, either the battery is dis- indicator in the instrument panel
charged or the connections are to blink rapidly (see page 77 ).
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery connections (see page
242 ). You can then try jump
starting the vehicle from a booster
battery (see page 253 ).
252
０４／０５／２７１８：２４：３１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５６
▼
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle:

procedure, you should take several
precautions. 1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
ProCarManuals.com
A battery can explode if you do seems slushy or frozen, do not try

not follow the correct procedure, jump starting until it thaws.
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
BOOSTER
If a battery sits in extreme BATTERY
Keep all sparks, open flames, 4-cylinder models
cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze.
and smoking materials away
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
from the battery. The numbers in the illustration show
battery can cause it to rupture.
the order to connect the jumper
cable.

2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
You cannot start your vehicle by
sories: heater, A/C, climate
pushing or pulling it.
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral
(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
parking brake.
CONTINUED
253
０４／０５／２７１８：２４：３７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５７
▼
Jump Starting
3. Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (＋) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (＋) terminal on the
booster battery.
ProCarManuals.com
BOOSTER
BATTERY
4. Connect the second jumper cable

to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
254
０４／０５／２７１８：２４：４４３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５８
▼
Jump Starting
7. Once your vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
ProCarManuals.com
Keep the ends of the jumper

cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
6-cylinder models Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
255
０４／０５／２７１８：２４：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２００２５９
▼
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running, and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
ProCarManuals.com
Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
take immediate action. The only then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or Put the transmission in Neutral or the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the hood. Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all accessories, and turn 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
on the hazard warning indicators. such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
2. If you see steam and/or spray so use caution. If you find a leak, it
Driving with the temperature coming from under the hood, turn must be repaired before you
gauge pointer at the red mark can off the engine. Wait until you see continue driving (see Emergency
cause serious damage to your engine. no more signs of steam or spray, Towing on page 263 ).
then open the hood.
256
０４／０５／２７１８：２５：０２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６０
▼
If the Engine Overheats
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, 8. Using gloves or large heavy cloth, 10.Put the radiator cap back on
check the coolant level in the turn the radiator cap tightly. Run the engine, and watch
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant counterclockwise, without pushing the temperature gauge. If it goes
if the level is below the MIN mark. down, to the first stop. After the back to the red mark, the engine
pressure releases, push down on needs repair (see Emergency
7. If there was no coolant in the the cap, and turn it until it comes Towing on page 263 ).
ProCarManuals.com
reserve tank, you may need to add off.

coolant to the radiator. Let the 11.If the temperature stays normal,
engine cool down until the pointer 9. Start the engine and set the check the coolant level in the
reaches the middle of the tempera- temperature control dial to radiator reserve tank. If it has
ture gauge, or lower, before check- maximum (climate control to gone down, add coolant to the
ing the radiator. FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add MAX mark. Put the cap back on
coolant to the radiator up to the tightly.
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
Removing the radiator cap mixture available, you can add

while the engine is hot can plain water. Remember to have
cause the coolant to spray out, the cooling system drained and
seriously scalding you. refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
257
０４／０５／２７１８：２５：０９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６１
▼
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
4. Start the engine and watch the oil

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR pressure indicator. If it does not go
Running the engine with low out within 10 seconds, turn off the
oil pressure can cause serious engine. There is a mechanical
mechanical damage almost immediately problem that needs to be repaired
Turn of f the engine as soon as you can before you can continue driving
saf ely get the vehicle stopped.
ProCarManuals.com
(see Emergency Towing on page

. 263 ).
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.

This indicator should never come on Open the hood, and check the oil
when the engine is running. If it level (see page 165 ). An engine
starts flashing or stays on, the oil very low on oil can lose pressure
pressure has dropped very low or during cornering and other driving
lost pressure. Serious engine maneuvers.
damage is possible and you should
take immediate action. 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 212 ).
258
０４／０５／２７１８：２５：１８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６２
▼
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Charging System Indicator Immediately turn off all electrical Malfunction Indicator Lamp
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
ProCarManuals.com
Go to a service station or garage

where you can get technical
assistance.
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
If the charging system indicator If the indicator comes on while

comes on brightly when the engine driving, it means one of the engine’s

is running, the battery is not being emission control systems may have a
charged. problem. Even though you may feel
no difference in your vehicle’s
performance, continued operation
may cause serious damage.
CONTINUED
259
０４／０６／０１１４：１６：２０３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６３
▼
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If you have recently refueled your Readiness Codes To check if they are set, turn the
vehicle, the cause of this indicator Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness ignition to ON (II), without starting
coming on could be a loose or codes’’ that are part of the on-board the engine. The Malfunction
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap diagnostics for the emissions Indicator Lamp will come on for 20
or replace it. Tightening the cap will systems. In some states, part of the seconds. If it then goes off, the
not make the indicator turn off emissions testing is to make sure readiness codes are set. If it blinks 5
ProCarManuals.com
immediately; it takes at least three these codes are set. If they are not times, the readiness codes are not
days of normal driving. set, the test cannot be completed. set. If possible, do not take your
vehicle for a state emissions test
If the indicator remains on or the If your vehicle’s battery has been until the readiness codes are set.
fuel cap was not loose or missing, disconnected or gone dead, these Refer to State Emissions Testing for
have the vehicle checked by the codes are erased. It takes at least more information (see page 285 ).
dealer as soon as possible. three days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If you keep driving with the

Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you
can damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties. This indicator may also
come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
260
０４／０５／２７１８：２５：３４３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６４
▼
Brake System Indicator
However, if the brake pedal does not Slow down by shifting to a lower
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR＊
feel normal, you should take gear, and pull to the side of the road
immediate action. A problem in one when it is safe. Because of the long
part of the system’s dual circuit distance needed to stop, it is
design will still give you braking at hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
two wheels. You will feel the brake should have it towed and repaired as
ProCarManuals.com
pedal go down much farther before soon as possible (see Emergency

the vehicle begins to slow down, and Towing on page 263 ).
you will have to press harder on the
pedal. If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
＊
U.S. indicator shown slowly and carefully.
If the brake system indicator comes If the ABS indicator comes on with
on while driving, the brake fluid level this indicator, have the vehicle
is probably low in the reservoir. inspected by your Honda dealer

Press lightly on the brake pedal to immediately.
see if it feels normal. If it does,
check the brake fluid level the next
time you stop at a service station
(see page 223 ). If the fluid level is
low, take your vehicle to the dealer
and have the brake system inspected
for leaks or worn brake pads.
261
０４／０５／２７１８：２５：４４３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６５
▼
Closing the Moonroof
On EX and EX-V6 models ROUND PLUG SOCKET

If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
1. Check the fuse for the moonroof

motor (see page 265 ). If the fuse
ProCarManuals.com
is blown, replace it with one of the

same or lower rating.
2. Try closing the moonroof. If the

new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually. 4. Use a screwdriver or coin to If you need to close the moonroof
remove the round plug in the manually, it means the moonroof
3. Get the moonroof wrench out of center of the headliner. opening/closing function is
the tool kit in the trunk. developing a problem. Have your
5. Insert the moonroof wrench into vehicle checked by a dealer.
the socket behind this plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the

round plug.
262
０４／０５／２７１８：２５：５８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６６
▼
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on
an organization. Never tow your the ground, do the following: Improper towing preparation will
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is damage the transmission. Follow the
very dangerous. Manual Transmission above procedure exactly. If you cannot
Release the parking brake. shif t the transmission or start the
ProCarManuals.com
There are two ways to tow your Shift the transmission to Neutral. engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle. Automatic Transmission: vehicle must be transported with the
Release the parking brake. f ront wheels of f the ground.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator Start the engine.
loads your vehicle on the back of a Shift to D, then to N.
truck. This is the best way to trans- Turn off the engine.
port your vehicle.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow

truck uses two pivoting arms that go

under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground. This is
an acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
CONTINUED
263
０４／０５／２７１８：２６：０４３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６７
▼
Emergency Towing
With the front wheels on the ground, If you decide to tow your vehicle
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther with all four wheels on the ground,
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the make sure you use a properly- The steering system can be damaged if
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h). designed and attached tow bar. the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
Prepare the vehicle for towing as ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I), and
If your vehicle is equipped with a described above, and leave the make sure the steering wheel turns
ProCarManuals.com
front spoiler, remove it before ignition switch in Accessory (I) so f reely bef ore you begin towing.
towing so it is not damaged. the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
socket are turned off so they do not
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the run down the battery.
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
264
０４／０５／２７１８：２６：１５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６８
▼
Fuses
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD Checking and Replacing Fuses

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
TAB Determine from the chart on pages
268 and 269 , or the diagram on the
ProCarManuals.com
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses

control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check if the device works.
The interior fuse box is on the The under-hood fuse box is located 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
driver’s lower left side. To remove near the back of the engine compart- (0). Make sure the headlights and
the fuse box lid, pull it toward you ment on the driver’s side. To open it, all other accessories are off.

and take it out of its hinges. push the tabs as shown.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
CONTINUED
265
０４／０５／２７１８：２６：２２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２６９
▼
Fuses
BLOWN BLOWN BLOWN

ProCarManuals.com
3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
the under-hood fuse box by under-hood fuse box and all the
looking at the wire inside. fuses in the interior fuse box by
Removing these fuses requires a pulling out each fuse with the fuse
Phillips-head screwdriver. puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
5. Look for a burned wire inside the

fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
266
０４／０６／０１１４：１６：２６３１ＳＤＡ６２００２７０
▼
Fuses
If you replace the blown fuse with a

FUSE PULLER spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
ProCarManuals.com
Replacing a f use with one that has a

higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
If you cannot drive the vehicle replacement f use with the proper rating
without fixing the problem, and you f or the circuit, install one with a lower
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse rating.

of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits with 6. If the replacement fuse of the
the fuse puller provided in the under- same rating blows in a short time,
hood fuse box. Make sure you can there is probably a serious
do without that circuit temporarily electrical problem with your
(such as the accessory power socket vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
or radio). that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
CONTINUED
267
０４／０５／２７１８：２６：４１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２７１
▼
Fuses
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
11 20 A Cooling Fan
11＊ 30 A Cooling Fan
12 7.5 A MG. Clutch
ProCarManuals.com
13 20 A Horn, Stop
14 40 A Rear Defroster
15 40 A Back Up, ACC
16 15 A Hazard
17 30 A ABS Motor
17＊ 30 A TCS Motor
18 20 A ABS F/S
18＊ 40 A TCS
19 40 A Ignition Coil, DRL (Canada)
20 (40 A) Power Seats, Seat Heaters
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 21 40 A Heater Motor
22 100 A Battery
1 10 A Left Headlight Low 6 10 A Right Headlight Low − Not Used
2 (30A) (Rear Defroster Coil) 7 7.5 A Back Up 23 50 A ＋B IG1 Main
3 10 A Left Headlight Hi 8 15 A FI ECU 50 A Power Window Main
4 15 A Small Light 9 20 A Condenser fan
5 10 A Right Headlight Hi 10 − Not Used ＊ : 6-cylinder models
268
０４／０５／２７１８：２６：５２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２７２
▼
Fuses
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
13 (20 A) Passenger’s Power Seat Recline

14 (20 A) Driver’s Power Seat Slide
15 (20 A) Heated Seat
ProCarManuals.com
16 (20 A) Driver’s Power Seat Recline

17 (20 A) Passenger’s Power Seat Slide
18 15 A IG ACG
19 15 A IG Fuel Pump
20 7.5 A IG Washer
21 7.5 A IG Meter
22 10 A IG SRS
23 7.5 A IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
24 20 A Left Rear Power Window
25 20 A Right Rear Power Window

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 26 20 A Right Front Power Window
27 20 A Driver’s Power Window
1＊1 (15 A) Drive by Wire 7 10 A Back-Up Lights 28 (20 A) Moonroof
2 15 A Ignition Coil 8 20 A Door Lock 29 − Not Used
3＊2 (10 A) Day Light 9 15 A Front Accessory Sockets 30 7.5 A IG HAC
4 15 A Laf Heater 10 7.5 A IG OPDS 31 − Not Used
5 10 A Radio 11 30 A IG Wiper 32 7.5 A ACC
6 7.5 A Interior Light 12 − Not Used 33 7.5 A HAC OP
＊1 : 6-cylinder models
＊2 : On Canadian models
269
０４／０５／２７１８：２６：５８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２７４
▼
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 272 Three Way Catalytic
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 274 Converter ............................ 283
your vehicle, and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading Replacement Parts..................... 283
identification numbers. It also (U. S. Vehicles) ...................... 277 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 284
includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality State Emissions Testing ............... 285
know about your vehicle’s tires and Grading ................................... 277
ProCarManuals.com
emissions control systems. Treadwear .................................. 277

Traction....................................... 277
Temperature .............................. 278
Tire Labeling .................................. 279
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 280
Driving in Foreign Countries ....... 281
Emissions Controls........................ 282
The Clean Air Act ...................... 282
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 282
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 282
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 282
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 283
PGM-FI System ..................... 283
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 283
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 283
271
０４／０５／２７１８：２７：０４３１ＳＤＡ６２００２７５
▼
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
ProCarManuals.com
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is

also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
place to find the VIN is on a plate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
You can see it by looking through
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
Certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
272
０４／０５／２７１８：２７：１２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２７６
▼
Identification Numbers
The Engine Number is stamped into 4-cylinder Models 6-cylinder Models

the engine block. It is on the front.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission. ENGINE
NUMBER
ProCarManuals.com
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
273
０４／０５／２７１８：２７：３２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２７７
▼
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 189.5 in (4,813 mm) Engine Change＊2
Width 71.7 in (1,820 mm) coolant Manual 1.35 US gal (5.1 )
Height 57.2 in (1,453 mm) Automatic 1.32 US gal (5.0 )
Wheelbase 107.9 in (2,740 mm) 1.77 US gal (6.7 ) ＊1
Track Front 61.1 in (1,553 mm) Total
Rear 61.2 in (1,554 mm) Manual 1.90 US gal (7.2 )
ProCarManuals.com
Automatic 1.88 US gal (7.1 )

Weights 2.22 US gal (8.4 ) ＊1
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Engine oil Change＊3
to the driver’s doorjamb. Including 4.4 US qt (4.2 )
filter 4.5 US qt (4.3 ) ＊1
Air Conditioning Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) filter
Charge quantity 25−27 oz (700−750 g) Total 5.6 US qt (5.3 )
16−18 oz (450−500 g)＊1 5.3 US qt (5.0 ) ＊1
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 Manual trans- Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 )
mission oil Total 2.2 US qt (2.1 )
Capacities Automatic Change 3.0 US qt (2.8 )
Fuel tank Approx. transmission 3.1 US qt (2.9 ) ＊1
17.09 US gal (64.7 ) fluid Total 6.9 US qt (6.5 )
7.6 US qt (7.2 ) ＊1
＊1 : 6-cylinder models Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
washer Canada Vehicles 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
reservoir
＊2 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 )
＊3 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
274
０４／０５／２７１８：２７：５８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２７８
▼
Specifications
Lights Engine
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Type Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
Low 12 V − 51 W (HB4) i-VTEC 4-cylinder, SOHC VTEC
Front turn signal/ 12 V − 24/2.2 CP 6-cylinder (V6), gasoline engine
Front parking lights Bore x Stroke 3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm) ＊3
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W (Amber) 3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)＊4
Stop/Taillights 12 V − 21/5 W Displacement 143.6 cu-in (2,354 cm ) ＊3
ProCarManuals.com
Taillights 12 V − 2 CP 182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm ) ＊4

High-mount brake light 12 V − 21 W Compression ratio 9.7 : 1＊3
Back-up lights 12 V − 21 W 10 : 1 ＊4
License plate light 12 V − 3 CP Spark plugs NGK: IZFR6K-11＊3, ＊4
Ceiling light 12 V − 8W DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11＊3, ＊4
Spotlights 12 V − 8 W＊1 NGK: IZFR6K-13 ＊3, ＊5
Spotlights/Front ceiling lights 12 V − 8 W＊2 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M13 ＊3, ＊5
Trunk light 12 V − 5W
Door courtesy light 12 V − 2 CP ＊3 : 4-cylinder models
Vanity mirror lights 12 V − 1.1 W ＊4 : 6-cylinder models
＊1 : LX ＊5 : On some models
＊2 : EX
Alignment
Battery Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Capacity 4-cylinder 12 V − 38 AH/5 HR Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
6-cylinder 12 V − 52 AH/5 HR Camber Front 0°
Rear −1°
Fuses Caster Front 3°15’
Interior See page 269 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door on each side of the
dashboard.
Under-hood See page 268 or the fuse box
cover. CONTINUED
275
０４／０５／２７１８：２８：０５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２７９
▼
Specifications
Tires
Size Front/Rear P195/65R15 89H ＊1
P205/65R15 92H ＊2
P205/60R16 91V ＊3
Spare T135/90D15
Pressure Front 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) ＊1, 3
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) ＊2
ProCarManuals.com
Rear 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) ＊1, 3

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm ) ＊2
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
＊1 : DX
＊2 : LX
＊3 : All EX and V6 models
276
０４／０５／２７１８：２８：１５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８０
▼
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction − AA, A, B, C

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
ProCarManuals.com
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between the tread shoulder and the depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices, and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these
grades.
277
０４／０５／２７１８：２８：２０３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８１
▼
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature − A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not over-
tire’s resistance to the generation of loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
heat and its ability to dissipate heat tion, or excessive loading, either
when tested under controlled separately or in combination, can
ProCarManuals.com
conditions on a specified indoor cause heat buildup and possible tire

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
law.
278
０４／０６／０１１４：１６：４７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８２
▼
Tire Labeling
Tire Labeling 16 − Rim diameter in inches. 2202 − Date of manufacture.

The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those 91 − Load index (a numerical code Maximum Tire Pressure
you should be aware of are described associated with the maximum Max Press − The maximum air
below. load the tire can carry). pressure the tire can
hold.
ProCarManuals.com
Tire Size V − Speed symbol (an

Whenever tires are replaced, they alphabetical code indicating Maximum Tire Load
should be replaced with tires of the the maximum speed rating). Max Load − The maximum load the
same size. Following is an example tire can carry at
of tire size with an explanation of Tire Identification Number maximum air pressure.
what each component means. Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
a group of numbers and letters that
P205/60R16 91V look like the following example TIN.
P − Vehicle type (P indicates DOT B97R FW6X 2202

passenger vehicle).
DOT − This indicates that the tire
205 − Tire width in millimeters. meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section Transportation.
height as a percentage of its
width). B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
R − Tire construction code (R
indicates radial). FW6X − Tire type code.
279
０４／０５／２７１８：２８：４９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８３
▼
Oxygenated Fuels
Some conventional gasolines are The following are the U.S. EPA and If you notice any undesirable
being blended with alcohol or an Canadian CGSB approved operating symptoms, try another
ether compound. These gasolines percentages of oxygenates: service station or switch to another
are collectively referred to as brand of gasoline.
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air ETHANOL (ethyl or grain alcohol)
standards, some areas of the United You may use gasoline containing up Fuel system damage or performance
ProCarManuals.com
States and Canada use oxygenated to 10 percent ethanol by volume. problems resulting from the use of
fuels to help reduce emissions. Gasoline containing ethanol may be an oxygenated fuel containing more
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’ than the percentages of oxygenates
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be given above are not covered under
sure it is unleaded and meets the MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl warranty.
minimum octane rating requirement. Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this METHANOL (methyl or wood
information to be posted on the alcohol)
pump. Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
280
０４／０５／２７１８：２８：５３３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８４
▼
Driving in Foreign Countries
If you are planning to take your

Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
ProCarManuals.com
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,

be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your vehicle back
into compliance will require the re-
placement of several components,
such as the oxygen sensors and the
three way catalytic converter. These
replacements are not covered under
warranty.
281
０４／０５／２７１８：２９：０２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８５
▼
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
ProCarManuals.com
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain tank, an evaporative emissions
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
ment. Under certain conditions of canister while the engine is off. After
＊
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
Carbon monoxide does not contri- requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
bute to smog creation, but it is a agreement with Environment
poisonous gas. Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
282
０４／０５／２７１８：２９：１４３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８６
▼
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls then controls how much fuel to inject Replacement Parts
The exhaust emissions controls under all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, designed and certified to work to-
ignition timing control, exhaust gas Ignition Timing Control System gether in reducing emissions to
recirculation and three way catalytic This system constantly adjusts the levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work ignition timing, reducing the amount Act. To make sure the emissions
ProCarManuals.com
together to control the engine’s of HC, CO, and NOx produced. remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the Honda replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) equivalent for repairs. Using lower
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust System quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and system takes some of the exhaust
evaporative emissions control gas and routes it back into the intake The emissions control systems are
systems. manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the covered by warranties separate from
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System of NOx produced when the fuel is warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI System uses sequential burned. tion.
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake, Three Way Catalytic Converter
engine control, and fuel control. The The three way catalytic converter is
powertrain control module (PCM) in in the exhaust system. Through
automatic transmission vehicles or chemical reactions, it converts HC,
the engine control module (ECM) in CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
manual transmission vehicles use to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
various sensors to determine how (N2), and water vapor.
much air is going into the engine. It
283
０４／０５／２７１８：２９：２３３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８７
▼
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
ProCarManuals.com
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts

on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
The three way catalytic converter 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic Keep the engine tuned-up.
place. It can set on fire any com- converter contributes to air pollution,
bustible materials that come near it. and can impair your engine’s per- Have your vehicle diagnosed and
Park your vehicle away from high formance. Follow these guidelines to repaired if it is misfiring, back-
grass, dry leaves, or other flamma- protect your vehicle’s three way firing, stalling, or otherwise not
bles. catalytic converter. running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
284
０４／０５／２７１８：２９：３２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８８
▼
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for a state the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle re-tested within the Keep the vehicle in Park
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can (automatic transmission) or
ProCarManuals.com
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by Neutral (manual transmission).
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. Increase the engine speed to 2,000
systems. These codes are erased rpm and hold it there until the
when the battery is disconnected, Make sure the gas tank is nearly, temperature gauge rises to at least
and set again only after several days but not completely, full (around 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
of driving under a variety of 3/4).
conditions.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
CONTINUED
285
０４／０５／２７１８：２９：３７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２８９
▼
State Emissions Testing
Select a nearby lightly traveled Then drive in city/suburban

major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes.
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 the vehicle coast for several
minutes. Drive on the highway in seconds without using the
D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use accelerator pedal or the brake
ProCarManuals.com
the cruise control. When traffic pedal.

allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator If the testing facility determines the
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary readiness codes are still not set, see
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot your dealer.
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
286
０４／０５／２７１８：２９：４１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９０
▼
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 288

Warranty Coverages ..................... 289
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicle) ............................. 290
Authorized Manuals ...................... 291

ProCarManuals.com
287
０４／０５／２７１８：２９：５０３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９１
▼
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are U.S. Owners: In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
trained professionals. They should American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Islands:
be able to answer all your questions. Automobile Customer Service
If you encounter a problem that your Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Bella International
dealership does not solve to your 1919 Torrance Boulevard P.O. Box 190816
satisfaction, please discuss it with Torrance, California 90501-2746 San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
ProCarManuals.com
the dealership’s management. The

service manager or general manager Tel: (800) 999-1009 (787) 250-4318
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way. Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
CUSTOMER RELATIONS us this information:
If you are dissatisfied with the RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
decision made by the dealership’s Honda Canada Inc. Vehicle Identification Number
management, contact your Honda 715 Milner Avenue (see page 272 )
Customer Service Office. Toronto, ON Name and address of the dealer
M1B 2K8 who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Mileage on your vehicle
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Your name, address, and tele-
Toronto (416) 287-4776 phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
288
０４／０５／２７１８：３０：０４３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９２
▼
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered for the useful life of the coverage for a replacement battery
vehicle. purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −

covers your new vehicle, except for Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime
ProCarManuals.com
the battery, emissions control − all exterior body panels are Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories, against covered for rust-through from the coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and inside for the specified time period chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. with no mileage limit. vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Accessory Limited Warranty − Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Honda Accessories are covered all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two under this warranty. Time and 2005 Honda Warranty Information
warranties cover your vehicle’s emis- mileage limits depend on the type of booklet that came with your vehicle
sions control systems. Time, mileage, accessory and other factors. Please for precise information on warranty
and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty manual for coverages. Your vehicle original tires
read the warranty manual for exact details. are covered by their manufacturer.
information. Tire warranty information is in a
Replacement Parts Limited separate booklet.
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − covers all Honda
Warranty − this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Canadian Owners
to 100 percent credit toward a materials and workmanship. Please refer to the 2005 Warranty
replacement battery. Manual that came with your vehicle.
289
０４／０５／２７１８：３０：０９３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９３
▼
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may either
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may Washington D.C. area) or write to:
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Administration (NHTSA) in addition However, NHTSA cannot become Transportation, Washington,
ProCarManuals.com
to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or other information about motor
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. vehicle safety from the Hotline.
290
０４／０６／０１１４：１６：５８３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９４
▼
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
ProCarManuals.com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
at 1-800-782-4356. OR
Publication Form Description Price By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
Form Number Each＊ pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
61SDA06 2003-2005 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4 $70.00 Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Service Manual Base Book
Authorized Manuals
61SDA07 2003-2005 Honda Accord 2/4 Door V6 $40.00 VEHICLE MODEL Price Total
PUBLICATION NUMBER Qty
Service Manual Supplement ２ Name Year Each＊ Price
61SDA06EL 2003-2005 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6 $50.00
０
０
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual ５
61SDA30 2003-2005 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6 $44.00
Body Repair Manual Ｈ
Ｏ
31SDA620 2005 Honda Accord 4 Door L4/V6 $34.00 Ｎ
Owner’s Manual
31SDA720 2005 Honda Accord L4/V6 Navigation Manual $29.00 ＊
Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL
31SDAQ20 2005 Honda Accord 4 Door L4/V6 $12.00 notice and without incurring obligation.
Mich. Purchases
Quick Start Guide Add 6% Sales Tax
31SDAM00 2005 Honda Accord Service History $12.00 Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.95
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years- FREE allow adequate time for delivery.
GRAND TOTAL
Indicate Year and Model Desired
＊
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
291
０４／０５／２７１８：３０：３４３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９５
▼
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, Service Manual:
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown This manual covers maintenance and recommended
below for a quotation. procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
Ｓ It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
Ｈ enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
Ｉ stand.
ProCarManuals.com
Customer Name Attention

Ｐ
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Ｔ Street Address − No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number
This manual complements the service manual by
Ｏ providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
City State & Zip Code
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Daytime Telephone Number ( )
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only. replacement of damaged body parts.
Ｐ Do not send cash
Ａ Master VISA Check here if your billing address is different

Ｙ Card from the shipping address shown above.
Ｍ Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.
Ｅ −
Ｎ
Ｔ
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
292
０４／０５／２７１８：３０：４１３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９６
▼
Main Menu
Index
A B High-mount Brake Light .......... 232

Specifications ............................. 275
Accessories..................................... 168 Battery Trunk Light ................................ 231
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Charging System Turn Signal Lights ..................... 229
Position) ........................................ 78 Indicator............................ 58, 259 Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 226
Accessory Power Socket .............. 103 Jump Starting ............................. 253
ProCarManuals.com
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 212 Maintenance ............................... 242 C

Airbag (SRS) .................................... 11 Specifications ............................. 275
Airbag System Components ........... 23 Before Driving ............................... 159 Capacities Chart............................. 274
Air Conditioning............................. 109 Belts, Seat ......................................... 10 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 52
Usage .......................................... 111 Brakes Carrying Cargo .............................. 170
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 237 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 185 CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 280 Break-in, New Linings .............. 160 CD Changer.................................... 128
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Bulb Replacement ..................... 231 CD Player ............................... 126, 127
Indicator ................................ 59, 186 Fluid ............................................ 223 CD Pocket, Center......................... 103
Operation .................................... 185 Parking .......................................... 99 Certification Label ......................... 272
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 78 System Indicator .......................... 59 Chains ............................................. 241
Audio System ......... 118, 126, 136, 141 Wear Indicators ......................... 184 Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 247
Automatic Speed Control.............. 151 Braking System.............................. 184 Changing Oil
Automatic Transmission............... 178 Break-in, New Car ......................... 160 How to ......................................... 214
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 274 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 72 When to .............. 202, 203, 204, 205
Shifting ........................................ 178 Brights, Headlights ......................... 70 Charging System Indicator .... 58, 259
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 178 Bulb Replacement
INDEX
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 174
Shift Lever Positions ................. 178 Brake Lights............................... 231 Childproof Door Locks ................... 81
Shift Lock Release ..................... 181 Front Parking Lights ................. 229
Headlights .................................. 226 CONTINUED
I
０４／０５／２７１８：３０：４７３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９７
▼
Main Menu
Index
Child Seats ........................................ 34 Daytime Running Lights................. 72 Emergencies on the Road............. 245
Lower Anchorage Points ............ 43 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 290 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 253
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 47 Defogger, Rear Window ................. 73 Brake System Indicator ............ 261
Climate Control Sensors ............... 117 Dimensions ..................................... 274 Changing a Flat Tire ................. 247
Clock, Setting the .......................... 149 Dimming the Headlights ................ 70 Charging System Indicator ...... 259
Clutch Fluid .................................... 224 Dipstick Checking the Fuses................... 265
ProCarManuals.com
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 280 Automatic Transmission .. 219, 220 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 258
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 175 Engine Oil ................................... 165 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 259
Compact Spare ............................... 246 Directional Signals ........................... 70 Manually Closing Moonroof .... 262
Console Compartment .................. 103 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 184 Overheated Engine ................... 256
Consumer Information.................. 288 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 215 Emergency Brake ............................ 99
Controls, Instruments and .............. 55 Doors Emergency Flashers ....................... 72
Coolant Locking and Unlocking ............... 79 Emergency Towing ....................... 263
Adding ......................................... 217 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 277 Emissions Controls........................ 282
Checking ..................................... 166 Downshifting, 5-speed Manual Engine
Proper Solution .......................... 217 Transmission .............................. 176 Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 65
Temperature Gauge .................... 65 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7 Malfunction Indicator
Crankcase Emissions Control Driving ............................................ 173 Lamp ....................................... 259
System......................................... 282 Economy ..................................... 167 Oil Pressure Indicator ............... 258
Cruise Control Operation ............. 151 In Foreign Countries ................. 281 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 212
Customer Service Office .............. 288 Dual Temperature Control ........... 115 Overheating................................ 256
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 233 Specifications ............................. 274
D Speed Limiter ..................... 177, 180
E Starting.......................................... 75
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii Engine Speed Limiter ........... 177, 180
Dashboard .................................... 4, 56 Economy, Fuel ............................... 167 Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 280
II
０４／０５／２７１８：３０：５５３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９８
▼
Main Menu
Index
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 282 Folding Rear Seat ............................ 91 Gearshift Lever Positions
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 52 Foreign Countries, Driving in ...... 281 Automatic Transmission........... 178
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Four-way Flashers ........................... 72 Manual Transmission.................... 176
Belts by ......................................... 18 Fuel .................................................. 160 Glove Box ....................................... 104
Cap Message ................................ 66
F Fill Door and Cap....................... 162 H
ProCarManuals.com
Gauge ............................................ 66
Fan, Interior.................................... 108 Octane Requirement ................. 160 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 226
Features .......................................... 105 Oxygenated ................................ 280 Hazard Warning Flashers............... 72
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 162 Tank, Filling the......................... 162 Headlights......................................... 70
Filter Fuses, Checking the ...................... 265 Aiming ......................................... 226
Dust and Pollen .......................... 233 Automatic Lighting Off ............... 71
Oil ................................................ 214 G Daytime Running Lights............. 72
Manual Transmission Low Beams, Turning on ............. 70
Checking Fluid Level ................ 222 Gas Mileage, Improving................ 167 Reminder Chime .......................... 70
Manual Transmission Gasohol ........................................... 280 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 226
Shifting the ................................. 176 Gasoline .......................................... 160 Turning on .................................... 70
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 72 Gauge ............................................ 66 Head Restraints ............................... 90
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 247 Octane Requirement ................. 160 Heating and Cooling ...................... 106
Fluids Tank, Filling the......................... 162 Heated Mirror .................................. 95
Automatic Transmission .. 219, 220 Gas Station Procedures................. 162 HomeLink Universal
Brake ........................................... 223 Gauges Transceiver................................. 154
INDEX
Clutch .......................................... 224 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 65 Hood, Opening and Closing the ... 163
Manual Transmission ............... 222 Fuel ................................................ 66 Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 224
Power Steering........................... 224 Speedometer ................................ 64
Windshield Washer ................... 216 Tachometer .................................. 64 CONTINUED
III
０４／０５／２７１８：３１：０２３１ＳＤＡ６２００２９９
▼
Main Menu
Index
I Jack, Tire ........................................ 247 Lower Gear, Downshifting to a.... 177

Jump Starting ................................. 253 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ............ 58
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 272 Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 274
Ignition K Luggage .......................................... 170
Keys............................................... 75
Switch ............................................ 78 Keys ................................................... 75 M
ProCarManuals.com
Timing Control System ............. 283

Immobilizer System......................... 77 L Maintenance ................................... 197
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Owner Maintenance Checks.... 201
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 58 Label, Certification ........................ 272 Record ......................................... 206
Infant Restraint ................................ 39 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 70 Required Indicator ....................... 66
Infant Seats ....................................... 39 Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................... 20 Safety........................................... 198
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 47 Lights Schedule .............................. 202-205
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 236 Bulb Replacement ..................... 226 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 259
Inside Mirror .................................... 94 Indicator ........................................ 57 Manual Transmission.................... 176
Inspection, Tire .............................. 238 Parking ........................................ 229 Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 222
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 43 Turn Signal ................................... 61 Meters, Gauges ................................ 64
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 44 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 78 Methanol in Gasoline .................... 280
Using LATCH .............................. 43 Locks Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 94
Instrument Panel ............................. 57 Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 78 Modifications.................................. 169
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 72 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 162 Moonroof .......................................... 98
Introduction ......................................... i Glove Box ................................... 104 Closing Manually ....................... 262
Lockout Prevention ..................... 80 Operation ...................................... 98
J Power Door .................................. 79
Trunk ............................................ 86
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 248 Low Coolant Level ......................... 166
IV
０４／０５／２７１８：３１：１０３１ＳＤＡ６２００３００
▼
Main Menu
Index
N Overheating, Engine ..................... 256 R

Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 201
Neutral Gear Position.................... 179 Oxygenated Fuel ........................... 280 Radiator Overheating .................... 256
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 160 Radio/CD Sound
Normal Shift Speeds...................... 177 P System ................ 119, 120, 126, 127
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 230
ProCarManuals.com
Numbers, Identification ................ 272 Panel Brightness Control ............... 72 Rear Seat, Folding ........................... 91
Park Gear Position......................... 178 Rear View Mirror ............................. 94
O Parking Brake .................................. 99 Rear Window Defogger .................. 73
Parking Lights.................................. 70 Reclining the Seat Backs .......... 88, 89
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 160 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 284 Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 177
Odometer .......................................... 64 Parking Tips ................................... 183 Reminder Lights .............................. 58
Odometer/Outside Temperature PGM-FI System.............................. 283 Remote Transmitter ........................ 81
Display ......................................... 64 Pollen Filter .................................... 233 Replacement Information
Odometer, Trip ................................ 65 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 18 Engine Oil and Filter ................. 214
Oil Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 Fuses ........................................... 265
Change, How to ......................... 214 Additional Safety Precautions .... 19 Light Bulbs ................................. 226
Change, When to ................ 202-205 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18 Schedule .............................. 202-205
Checking Engine ....................... 165 Protecting Children ......................... 34 Tires ............................................ 239
Pressure Indicator ............... 58, 258 Protecting Infants and Small Wiper Blades .............................. 234
Selecting Proper Viscosity Children ........................................ 39 Replacing Seat Belts After a
Chart ....................................... 213 Protecting Larger Children ............ 48 Crash ............................................. 21
Using Booster Seat ...................... 49
INDEX
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 78 Reserve Tank, Coolant .................. 217
Operation in Foreign Countries ... 281 Restraint, Child ................................ 34
Outside Mirrors ............................... 94
Outside Temperature ...................... 64 CONTINUED
V
０４／０５／２７１８：３１：１５３１ＳＤＡ６２００３０１
▼
Main Menu
Index
Reverse Gear Position................... 179 Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 41 Speedometer .................................... 64
Rotation, Tire ................................. 239 Select/Reset Knob .......................... 67 SRS, Additional Information........... 20
Serial Number ................................ 272 Additional Safety Precautions .... 33
S Service Intervals ..................... 202-205 Airbag Service .............................. 28
Service Manual .............................. 293 How the Passenger Airbag Off
Safety Belts....................................... 10 Service Station Procedure ............ 162 Indicator Works ....................... 31
ProCarManuals.com
Safety Defects, Reporting............. 290 Setting the Clock ........................... 149 How Your SRS Indicator
Safety Features .................................. 9 Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 178 Works ........................................ 30
Airbags .......................................... 11 Shift Lock Release ......................... 181 How Your Front Airbags
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 Side Airbags ............................... 11, 28 Works ........................................ 25
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 53 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 How Your Side Airbags
Safety Messages ................................ ii How the Side Airbag Off Works ........................................ 28
Satellite Radio................................. 141 Indicator Works ....................... 29 SRS Components ......................... 20
Seat Belts .......................................... 10 Side Curtain Airbags ................. 11, 30 SRS Indicator.............................. 30, 59
Additional Information ................ 20 How Your Side Curtain START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 78
Automatic Seat Belt Airbags Work ........................... 30 Starting the Engine........................ 175
Tensioners ................................ 21 Signaling Turns ................................ 70 With a Dead Battery ................. 253
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 20 Snow Tires ...................................... 240 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 256
Maintenance ................................. 21 Sound System Steering Wheel
Reminder Light and .............. 118, 119, 126, 127 136, 137 Adjustment ................................... 74
Beeper ................................. 20, 58 Spare Tire Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 78
System Components.................... 20 Inflating ....................................... 246 Stereo Sound
Use During Pregnancy................ 18 Specifications ............................. 276 System
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 20 Specifications Charts..................... 274 .......... 118, 119, 126, 127 136, 137
Seats, Adjusting the .................... 88-90 Speed Control ................................. 152 Sun Visor......................................... 100
Security System ............................. 150 Speed Limiter ......................... 177, 180 Sunglasses Holder ......................... 104
VI
０４／０５／２７１８：３１：２３３１ＳＤＡ６２００３０２
▼
Main Menu
Index
Supplemental Restraint Tires ................................................ 236 Shifting the Automatic .............. 178
System................................. 11, 23 Air Pressure ............................... 237 Shifting the Manual ................... 176
Servicing ....................................... 32 Checking Wear .......................... 238 Treadwear ...................................... 277
SRS Indicator.......................... 30, 58 Compact Spare ........................... 246 Trip Meter ........................................ 65
System Components.................... 23 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 277 Trunk................................................. 85
Synthetic Oil ................................... 213 Inflation ....................................... 236 Emergency Opener ..................... 86
ProCarManuals.com
Inspection ................................... 238 Opening the .................................. 85

T Replacing .................................... 239 Open Monitor Light .................... 60
Rotating....................................... 239 Turn Signals ..................................... 70
Tachometer ...................................... 64 Snow ............................................ 240
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 230 Specifications ............................. 276 U
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 245 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 247
Technical Descriptions Towing Unexpected, Taking Care
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 277 A Trailer ...................................... 190 of the ........................................... 245
Emissions Control Systems ...... 282 Emergency Wrecker ................. 263 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 277
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 280 Traction Control System............... 187 Unleaded Gasoline......................... 160
Three Way Catalytic TCS Activation Indicator .... 60, 187 Upholstery Cleaning...................... 233
Converter ................................ 284 TCS Indicator ....................... 60, 187 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 215
Temperature Gauge ........................ 65 TCS ON/OFF Switch................ 188
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 47 Transmission V
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 284 Checking Fluid Level,
Time, Setting the ........................... 149 Automatic ....................... 219, 220 Vanity Mirror ................................. 100
Timing Belt ..................................... 225 Checking Fluid Level,
INDEX
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 171
Tire Chains ..................................... 241 Manual .................................... 222 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 274
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 247 Fluid Selection ........... 219, 221, 222
Tire Labeling .................................. 279 Identification Number............... 272 CONTINUED
VII
０４／０５／２７１８：３１：２７３１ＳＤＡ６２００３０３
▼
Main Menu
Index
Vehicle Identification Number..... 272 Operation ...................................... 69

Vehicle Storage .............................. 243 Worn Tires ..................................... 238
VIN .................................................. 272 Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 264
Viscosity, Oil................................... 213
W
ProCarManuals.com
WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii

Warning Labels, Location of .......... 53
Warranty Coverages ..................... 289
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 216
Operation ...................................... 69
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 74
Alignment and Balance ............. 238
Compact Spare ........................... 246
Wrench ....................................... 249
Windows
Operating the Power ................... 95
Rear, Defogger ............................ 73
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 69
Washers ........................................ 69
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 234
VIII
０４／０５／２７１８：３１：４８３１ＳＤＡ６２００３０５
▼
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Manual Transmission Fluid: Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Honda Manual Transmission LX
number of 86 or higher. Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 Front:
or 10W-40 motor oil as a 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Fuel Tank Capacity: temporary replacement (see page Rear:
17.09 US gal (64.7 ) 222 ). 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
ProCarManuals.com
Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil: 2.0 US qt (1.9 ) All other models
API Premium grade 5W-20 Front:
detergent oil (see page 213 ). Power Steering Fluid: 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Honda Power Steering Fluid Rear:
Oil change capacity (including preferred, or another brand of 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
filter): power steering fluid as a
4-cylinder models temporary replacement. Do not
4.4 US qt (4.2 ) use ATF (see page 224 ).
6-cylinder models
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid: DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or replacement (see page 223 ).
a DEXRON III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see
pages 219 and 220 ).

Honda Accord Sedan 2005 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honda Accord Sedan 2005 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honda Accord Sedan 2005 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2005 Accord 4dr Online Reference Owner's Manual

Owner's Identification Form

you can refer to it at any time.

A Few Words About Safety

decisions about safety, we have

Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

Your Vehicle at a Glance

AIRBAGS (P.11, 23)

(P.94) AUDIO SYSTEM

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER HOOD RELEASE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG

Your Vehicle at a Glance

MOONROOF REAR WINDOW

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM STEERING WHEEL HORN

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

action on your part. These include a

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

instrument panel to remind you and

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose hazards. To do

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

or ride in the front.

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

Driver and Passenger Safety

Adjust the seat-back to an

Reclining a seat-back so that the

Protecting Adults and Teens

twisted belt can cause serious Improperly positioning the seat

Make sure all seat belts are

If necessary, pull up on the belt again

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

This will reduce the risk of injuries

Protecting Adults and Teens

Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away

Driver and Passenger Safety

Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on

Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt restrain your body.

plate into the buckle, then tug on the page 45 ).

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

When the tensioners are activated, Honda provides a lifetime warranty